JP6669906B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a result of the game is a special result.

  2. Description of the Related Art There has been known a gaming machine that executes a game based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a result of the game is a special result. Such a gaming machine includes a plurality of control devices and devices for controlling a game and an effect, and is connected to these devices by a cable (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-235969 A

  An object of the present invention is to improve the efficiency of cable connection work.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1 is
In a gaming machine that executes a game based on establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a result of the game is a special result,
A front opening / closing unit which is openably and closably supported by the support unit with one of the left and right directions as a rotation axis and the other as an open side,
And a control board for controlling of the gaming machine,
The control board includes a plurality of board-side connectors that are connectors for detachably connecting cables,
In the cable, a plurality of codes are arranged in a row or a plurality of rows in parallel , and a code with identification information is arranged at an end of the row ,
The plurality of board-side connectors arranged in a predetermined range are arranged such that the cords to be connected are aligned in the same direction ,
Among the cables in which the plurality of cords are arranged in parallel in one row or a plurality of rows, the board-side connector to which the cable in which the plurality of cords are arranged in one row is connected, the cord alignment direction of the connected cable is Are arranged so that the code to which the discrimination information is attached is on the open side .
The invention according to claim 2 is
In a gaming machine that executes a game based on establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a result of the game is a special result,
A front opening / closing unit which is openably and closably supported by the support unit with one of the left and right directions as a rotation axis and the other as an open side,
A board on which a plurality of board-side connectors, which are connectors for detachably connecting cables, are provided,
In the cable, a plurality of codes are arranged in a line, and a code with identification information is arranged at an end of the line,
The plurality of board-side connectors arranged in a predetermined range are arranged such that the cords to be connected are aligned in the same direction,
In the board-side connector to which a cable in which a plurality of cords are arranged in a line is connected, an arrangement direction of the cords of the connected cables is the left-right direction, and the cord with the identification information is the open side. It is characterized by being arranged as follows.

  According to the present invention, the efficiency of cable connection work is improved.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining a 1st special fluctuation winning device. It is an enlarged explanatory view showing the details of the collective display device. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a figure explaining an operation mode in a special game state. It is a figure explaining an operation mode in a special game state. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a model designation command. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. 9 is a flowchart illustrating random number update processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining a winning opening switch / status monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a fraud & winning monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining a gaming machine state check process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining V abnormal passage monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a remaining sphere monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a discharge ball monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure game process. It is a flowchart explaining a starting port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure starting port switch common process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure suspension information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a prefetch big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning a prize port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a lower big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a probable change operation area switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a remaining ball processing timer update process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure ordinary process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 change start process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 change start process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a figure explaining execution timing of a regular production and a condition achievement production. It is a figure explaining an example of a regular production and a condition achievement production. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a 2-byte distribution process. It is a figure explaining a change group table. It is a flowchart explaining a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure changing process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining the time reduction change frequency update process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure game information check processing. It is a flowchart explaining fanfare / interval process shift setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart for explaining the processing shift setting processing 1 during opening of the special winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process change setting process 2 during the opening of the special winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during opening of a special winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit operation | movement setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning a prize mouth residual ball processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining a lever solenoid control process. It is a flowchart explaining a PB gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a PB input command editing process. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an output mode of a PB command. It is a flowchart explaining an effect command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart explaining a general-purpose game process. It is a flowchart explaining a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a normal electric winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a usual process. It is a flowchart explaining the process change setting process during normal figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a normal figure display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a normal drawing. It is a flowchart explaining a normal power operation shift setting process. It is a figure explaining an operation mode of a normal fluctuation winning device. It is a flowchart explaining a normal electric power remaining sphere process. It is a flowchart explaining the end process per ordinary figure. It is a flowchart explaining a segment LED editing process. It is a flowchart explaining abnormal discharge monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining magnet fraud monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a main award ball signal editing process. It is a flowchart explaining an opening signal editing process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a hall / player setting mode process. It is a flowchart explaining a reception command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a reception command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a jackpot system command process. It is a figure explaining an execution mode of a special game state. It is a figure explaining another example of an execution mode of a special game state. It is a figure explaining another example of an execution mode of a special game state. It is a flowchart explaining a one-shot system command process. It is a flowchart explaining a PB information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining an effect button input process. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an input state by a PB command and an operation of an operation unit. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of the game machine. It is a rear view of a gaming machine. It is a partial enlarged drawing in the back of the 1st control device. It is a rear view of a 2nd control device. It is a figure explaining an auxiliary production. It is a flowchart explaining an auxiliary effect control process. It is a figure explaining setting of an opening standby time in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining setting of an opening standby time in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining a modification of a game board. It is a figure explaining the mode of operation in the special game state in the 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining the execution mode in the special game state in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the process during opening of the special winning opening in the second modification. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare / interval processing in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit command processing in a 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining execution timing of a regular production and a condition achievement production in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining an example of a regular production and a condition achievement production in a 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining an example of a regular production and a condition achievement production in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the change pattern setting process in the 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure information setting processing in the 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the change group table in the 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the mode of execution of the special figure change display game in the 5th modification, and a display time table. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interruption process in the 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 game process in the 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 game process in the 5th modification. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 1 usual processing in the 5th modification. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 2 usual processing in the 5th modification. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 1 change start processing in the 5th modification. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 2 change start processing in the 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 change process in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 changing process in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 1 display in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 1 display in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure 2 display in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure 2 display in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 forced stop process in the 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 display process shift setting processing 2 in the 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 forced stop process in the 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process shift setting process 2 in the 5th modification.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is attached to an outer frame (support frame) 11 via a hinge 13 so as to be openable and closable at the left and right ends as viewed from the front side. I have. The outer frame 11 has a rectangular frame shape that penetrates back and forth, and is fixed to island facilities of a game store. The front frame 12 is rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11 about a rotation shaft 13 a extending in the vertical direction, and the right side when viewed from the front side of the gaming machine 10 is the open end side. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage section (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main frame) 12 so as to be capable of opening and closing and rotating.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 to decorate and produce, and notify when an abnormality has occurred (for example, when a dispensing abnormality has occurred, the lamp, LED, and the like are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). ), A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19 a that emits sound (for example, sound effect). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b notify the details of the abnormality by voice. In addition, you may make it provide the lamp for payment abnormality notification in the predetermined part of the glass frame 15. FIG.

  The frame decoration device 18 on the right side when viewed from the front side of the gaming machine 10 is one of auxiliary effect devices capable of executing an auxiliary effect that is an effect performed in response to a game effect that is an effect according to the progress of the game. Is provided. The protruding portion 80 is provided so as to protrude from the right side surface of the front frame 12, so that a player playing a game with the gaming machine can be visually recognized and a player playing a game with the gaming machine. It can be seen from other people. The protruding portion 80 includes a plurality of light emitting regions 81 arranged in the vertical direction. Each of the light emitting areas 81 can independently control a light emitting mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, light emitting color, etc.), and an auxiliary effect is executed by the light emitting mode of the plurality of light emitting areas 81.

  In the game effect that is an effect in accordance with the progress of the game, for example, an error notification that informs that an error has occurred in the gaming machine, a game effect relating to the special figure variable display game being executed, and a preliminary determination result regarding the start memory There is a look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the user, an effect button operation effect that instructs the operation of the operation means, and a launch direction instruction notification that instructs the launch direction of the game ball in the game area. The protruding portion 80 executes the auxiliary effect by changing the light emission mode of the plurality of light emitting areas 81 in accordance with the game effect selected from the game effects according to the current game state.

  An upper plate 21 (reservoir plate) for supplying game balls to a hit ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 are provided below the front frame 12. An outlet 22 for the upper plate ball flowing out, a lower plate (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball firing device, and the like are provided. Further, on the upper edge of the upper plate 21, an effect button 25 including an effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from a player is provided. A touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from a player is provided on an upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. The effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 form an operation means for receiving an operation of the player. Further, the effect button 25 has a built-in LED so that the light emission mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, light emission color, etc.) on the upper surface can be changed. , An auxiliary effect can be executed. That is, the effect button 25 also constitutes one of the auxiliary effect devices capable of executing the auxiliary effect corresponding to the game effect.

  Further, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12. In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25. However, the touch panel 29 may be provided separately from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided near the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  On the right side of the effect button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button that is operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hit ball launching device moves the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front of the game board 30. Fire. In addition, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), an effect or the like in which the operation of the player is interposed is performed. It can be carried out.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment. A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is configured to be surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 having a display device 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is mounted in a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41, protrude forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and prevent game balls from jumping from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) has a configuration in which three 7-segment displays (variable display regions) in which seven luminous bodies (segments) are arranged in a figure of eight are arranged. Each illuminant can independently change the light emission mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, light emission color, etc.), and by controlling the light emission mode, identification information (special symbol) can be displayed for each 7-segment display. is there. It is also possible to display information by combining a plurality of 7-segment displays. The display device 41 displays a decorative special figure variation display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols) are variation displayed in correspondence with the special figure variation display game and then stop-displayed. Further, effects relating to the special figure change display game can be executed by changing the light emission mode.

  In addition, a board effect device 44 that performs a game effect by operating is provided above the display device 41 in the center case 40. The board effect device 44 is a drum-type device that is rotatable about an axis along the left-right direction, and is configured such that only a part of the peripheral surface facing the front can be visually recognized by the player. . Information is displayed on the peripheral surface for each area that is visible when facing the front, multiple types of information are displayed along the circumferential direction, and information displayed on the peripheral surface facing the front The effect of the special figure change display game is performed. Further, below the display device 41 in the center case 40, there is provided a decoration special figure start storage display unit 42 for performing a decoration special figure start storage display corresponding to the start memory.

  Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, start winning area) for providing a start condition of the special figure 1 variable display game is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 5). In addition, below the start winning opening 36, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a winning opening or the like is provided.

  On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal symbol start gate (general symbol start gate) 34 for giving a start condition of the general symbol change display game. The game ball that has passed through the ordinary figure starting gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 5).

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32 and below the ordinary figure starting gate 34, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning port, starting winning area) for giving a start condition of the special figure 2 variable display game is provided. Is provided.
The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened by turning the upper end side in a direction of falling toward the front side and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. The movable member 37b is always The game ball is kept vertical and closed (unfavorable for the player) so that the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal-floating display game is a predetermined stop display mode, the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 5) serving as a driving device is operated so that the upper end side is inclined to the front side, and the normal-variation winning is achieved. The device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to a player) in which a game ball easily flows into the device 37. The game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 5). It should be noted that a prize may be made even when the ordinary variable prize device 37 is in the closed state, and it may be more difficult to win in the closed state than in the open state.

  On the left side below the center case 40 in the game area 32, three general winning openings 35 are arranged, and on the right side below the center case 40 and below the normal variable winning device 37, one general winning opening 35 is provided. Are located. The gaming balls that have won the general winning opening 35 are detected by a winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 5).

  Further, in the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a first special variable prize winning device (lower prize winning opening) capable of converting between a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which game balls are easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variable display game. 38 and a second special variable prize winning device (upper winning prize port) 39 are provided.

  The first special fluctuation winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side falls down toward the near side, and is a result of a special figure fluctuation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the lower large winning opening is changed from a closed state (a closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state advantageous for the player). That is, the first special variable winning device 38 has, for example, a lower big winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening / closing door 38c driven by a lower big winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 5) as a driving device, and during the special gaming state. Converts the lower winning opening from a closed state to an open state, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the lower winning opening, and giving a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. ing. Inside the lower special winning opening (winning area), a lower special winning switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 5) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the lower special winning opening is provided. I have.

  The second special fluctuation winning device 39 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 39c that can be opened by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side falls down to the front side, and is a result of a special figure fluctuation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on the situation, the state of the winning opening is changed from a closed state (closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (state advantageous to the player). That is, the second special variable winning device 39 includes, for example, an upper winning hole that is opened and closed by an opening / closing door 39c driven by an upper winning hole solenoid 39b (see FIG. 5) as a driving device, and during the special game state. Converts the upper winning a prize opening from a closed state to an open state, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the upper prize winning opening and giving a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. ing. Inside the upper winning prize port (winning area), an upper prize winning switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 5) is disposed as a detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the upper prize winning port. I have.

  FIG. 3 shows a flow path of a game ball in the first special variable winning device 38. Inside the first special variable winning device 38 (winning area), a lower large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a is provided as a detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the first special variable winning device 38. ing. All the game balls that have entered the first special variable winning device 38 are detected through the lower large winning opening switch 38a and flow into the upper channel 38j.

  The upper flow path 38j is provided with a probable operation area 38h into which a game ball can flow, and a lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 5) so as to change the probability of the game ball flowing into the probable operation area 38h. An operating lever member 38i is provided. The lever member is a plate-like member slidable in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 3, the lever member protrudes forward to cover the probable operation region 38h. Then, it can be changed to the open state in which the game ball can flow into the certain variation operation area 38h.

  The positive-variation operation area 38h is provided with a positive-variation operation area switch 38d capable of detecting the inflow of a game ball, and the game ball flowing into the positive-variation operation area 38h is detected by the positive-variation operation area switch 38d, and then the lower flow path 38k is detected. Flows into. Based on the detection of a game ball by the positive change operation area switch 38d, the probability state of the special figure change display game becomes a high probability state after the end of the special game state.

  Further, on the downstream side of the positive flow path 38j on the left side of the positive variable operation area 38h, a passing port switch 38g capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is provided, and the game ball which has not flowed into the positive variable operation area 38h is After being detected by the passage switch 38g, it flows into the lower flow path 38k. The lower flow path 38k is configured such that the flow path in which the game ball that has passed through the positive change operation area 38h flows down and the flow path in which the game ball that has passed through the passage switch 38g flows down merge on the downstream side. At the downstream end of the lower flow path 38k, a discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided, and all the game balls flowing into the lower flow path 38k are detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e. After that, it flows into a discharge channel for discharging game balls to the outside of the gaming machine.

  In the first special variable winning device 38 configured as described above, the number of game balls detected by the lower large winning opening switch 38a matches the number of game balls detected by the positive change operation area switch 38d and the passage switch 38g. By doing so, it can be confirmed that all the game balls that have flowed into the upper channel 38j have been discharged. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the positive change operation area switch 38d and the passage opening switch 38g matches the number of game balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e, all the game balls flowing into the lower flow path 38k are reduced. You can confirm that it was discharged. In addition, when the number of game balls flowing in detected by the lower large winning opening switch 38a matches the number of game balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e, the number of game balls flowing into the first special variable winning device 38 is reduced. It can be confirmed that all have been discharged.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the left area of the center case 40 is defined as the left gaming area in the gaming area 32 in which the game ball flows down, and the right area of the center case 40. Is the right game area. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and fires the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), so that the player can aim at the start winning prize port 36 and the general prize port 35, and can play the game to the right game area. By firing the ball (so-called right-handed), it is possible to aim for a prize at the general-purpose starting gate 34, the normal fluctuation prize device 37, the first special fluctuation prize device 38, the second special fluctuation prize device 39, and the general prize port 35. I can do it.

  Further, a plate-shaped partition wall 91 is provided between the center case 40 and the guide rail 31 from above the center case 40 to the right side in the game area 32. The partition wall 91 is disposed along the guide rail 31 at an interval equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball from the guide rail 31. The partition wall 91 has a width from the front of the game board main body 90 to the front and rear width of the game area 32 (the width from the front of the plate-shaped game board main body 90 to the back of the cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front of the game board 30). ).

  The interval between the partition wall 91 and the regulating wall 92 formed on the outer periphery of the center case 40 to prevent the game balls from flowing into the center case 40 is also equal to or larger than the diameter of the game balls. Accordingly, both sides of the partition wall 91 are flow-down areas in which game balls can flow down, and the first flow-down area 93 sandwiched between the partition wall 91 and the guide rail 31, the partition wall 91 and the regulation wall 92. A second flow-down region 93 is formed between the two regions.

  Which of the first downflow area 93 and the second downflow area 93 the game ball flows into can be selected by adjusting the firing force. The inflow ports of the first downflow area 93 and the second downflow area 93 are located above the center case 40, and the inflow port of the first downflow area 93 is located above the inflow port of the second downflow area 93. are doing. Therefore, in order to aim the inflow of the game ball into the second downflow area 93, it is necessary to make the firing force weaker than when the game ball is flown into the first downflow area 93.

  When the size of the center case 40 is small like the game board 30, a large space is formed between the guide rail 31 and the regulating wall 92. In this case, it is common to place obstacle members such as game nails and windmills in this space, but when performing a right-handed shot due to the presence of the obstacle members, the timing and speed of the game ball reaching the right game area Will vary. For this reason, it is difficult to stably reach the game ball on the right side of the game area, and stable winning in the special variable prize device 38 or the normal variable prize device 37 is hindered, and the profit of the player is reduced. There is a risk.

  Therefore, by dividing this space into the first downflow area 93 and the second downflow area 93 by the partition wall 91, the first downflow area 93 can be stably reached without any obstacles and the game ball can reach the right game area. The second downflow area 93 can be an area where the change of the rolling mode of the game ball by the obstacle member is enjoyed. As a result, it is possible to appropriately secure the profit of the player while increasing the interest of the game.

  In addition, by providing the first downflow area 93 without the obstacle member on the upper side, when the operation unit 24 is rotated to the maximum and the game ball is fired with the strongest firing force, it flows into the first downflow area 93. Become. By setting the first flow-down region 93 to have a width in which the game balls flow down in a line, the game balls heading leftward can be always received by the buffer portion 95 provided on the guide rail 31. As a result, it is possible to prevent a game ball having a strong firing force from colliding with a portion other than the buffer portion 95, and it is possible to prevent the game board 30 from being damaged.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a PB input mode switching gate 96 is provided in the second downflow area 93. The PB input mode switching gate 96 is a gate through which a game ball can pass, and has a PB input mode switching gate switch 96a for detecting the passage of the game ball therein. As will be described later, every time a game ball is detected by the PB input mode switching gate switch 96a, a state equivalent to a state where the player has operated without operating the operation means (the effect button 25, the touch panel 29) is set. The automatic input mode is switched between a manual input mode and a manual input mode in which no operation is performed unless the player operates the operation means. As a result, the player can switch between the auto input mode and the manual input mode by adjusting the firing force and passing through the PB input mode switching gate 96 according to the player's intention.

  Outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right portion of the game board 30), the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, which constitute the special figure variable display game, and the prize to the general figure start gate 34 are displayed. A collective display device 50 is provided for displaying a game-changing display game as a trigger and displaying various information.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 display for a special figure 1 variable display game (a first special figure variable display section) configured with a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. 51 (D1) and a special figure 2 display (second special figure change display unit) 52 (D2) for the special figure 2 variable display game, and a start memory number notification of the special figure 1 variable display game constituted by an LED lamp. Special display 1 reservation display 54 (D11, D12), and special figure 2 reservation display 55 (D13, D14) for informing the start storage number of the special figure 2 change display game.

  In addition, the batch display device 50 has a round display unit 60 (D3 to D7) for displaying the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the second special variable winning device 39), The first gaming state display unit 76 (D9) for informing whether or not the player is in the middle, and for informing the player how to strike (hitting corresponding to the gaming state) which is advantageous to left-handed (normal hit) and right-handed. A two game state display section 77 (D8) is provided. In addition, a third game state display unit (third game state display unit, probability state display unit) 78 (D17) for displaying that the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on is provided. Have been. In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a general-purpose display display 74 (D10, D18) for a general-purpose change display game, and a general-purpose display 75 (D15, D16) for notifying the number of start memories of the general-purpose change display game. Is provided.

  The special figure variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the variable display game, that is, while the decorative special figure variable display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is driven to blink to indicate that it is changing. The blink cycle is set to, for example, 100 ms. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 change display game on the special figure 1 display 51, as shown in FIG. 4B, in addition to the central segment, the special figure 1 is provided on the lower right side of 7 seg. The eighth segment is also driven to blink so as to indicate that it is fluctuating, so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished. In addition, it may be displayed that a plurality of pieces of identification information (a special figure and a special symbol) for displaying the special figure change display game are being changed to indicate that the game is changing. When the result of the game is "missing", for example, the central segment (the eighth segment on the lower right side in addition to the special figure 1) is turned on as a result mode of the missing, and the result of the game is In the case of "hit", the game result is displayed by turning on a result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the loss result mode as a hit result mode (special result mode).

  The special figure 1 hold display 54 displays the number of undigested balls (first start storage number = hold number) among the number of prize balls to the first start winning opening 36 which is a change start condition of the special figure 1 display 51. As shown in FIG. 4 (c), a plurality of LEDs are displayed by turning off and lighting (blinking). The special figure 2 reservation display 55 displays the number of undigested balls (second starting storage number = reservation number) among the number of prize balls to the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 which is a fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52, As shown in FIG. 4C, a plurality of LEDs are displayed by turning off and lighting (flashing). The round display section 60 is configured by an LED lamp or the like, and turns off all LEDs when not in the special game state, and is selected according to the result during the special game state as shown in FIG. 4D. The LED is turned on corresponding to the number of rounds. The round display section may be constituted by a 7-segment display.

  As shown in FIG. 4E, the first game state display unit 76 turns on the LED when the time saving state is set, and turns off the LED when the time saving state is not set. As shown in FIG. 4 (e), the second game state display unit 77 turns off the LED when the left-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed game (at the time of normal beating), In the case of a game state in which right-handed is more advantageous to the player than left-handed (right-handed), the LED is turned on. As shown in FIG. 4E, the third game state display unit 78 turns on the LED when the power is turned on when the state is in the high probability state, and turns off the LED when the state is not the high probability state.

  In the general-figure display game on the general-figure display 74, during the fluctuating display of the general-figure fluctuation display game, two symbols are alternately turned on by changing the fluctuating symbol numbers shown in FIG. Indicates that it is changing. If the result is a hit, it is lit in a lighting mode according to the hit type to indicate a hit, and if the result is a miss, the two LEDs are turned off to indicate a miss. . FIG. 4 (FIG. 4 ()) shows the number of undigested spheres (the number of stored ordinary figure starting = the number of reserved) among the number of passing balls of the general figure starting gate 34, which is a variation start condition of the general figure display 74. As shown in f), a plurality of LEDs are displayed by turning off and lighting (flashing).

FIG. 5 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in a comprehensive manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. A CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110 with the input unit 120 and the output unit 130. .

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator. The CPU 110 operates an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock used as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 to generate. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400, so that they can operate. Is done.

  The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V DC from a 24 V AC power supply and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower-level DC voltage such as 12 V DC and 5 V DC from the 32 V DC voltage. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal and a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, You may comprise so that it may be provided on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, as in the present embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on the power supply device 400 or a board different from the main board. Is provided, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be constituted by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. That is, the RAM 111C functions as a storage unit that can hold data even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, at the time of turning on the power or recovering from the power failure, the reset signal is output after a lapse of a predetermined time from that point.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated. Based on the signal, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 are forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of a forced interrupt signal, and resets the entire control system. The RAM initialization switch 112 may be operated to release the error even when the power is not turned on. In this case, only the error is released, and the processing such as the initialization of the RAM 111C is not performed. .

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area for various signals and random numbers during game control. Used as An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

  The ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for determining the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 stored as the starting memory by the CPU 111A. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a variation variation pattern table selected when the result is incorrect, a large variation pattern table selected when the result is a large hit, and the like. Further, a change pattern table for determining the change time of the normal figure change display game is also stored.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is set, some of the plurality of display results are already derived and displayed at a stage where they are not yet displayed. This refers to a display state in which the displayed result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state deviates from the display condition of the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed. No display mode. Then, for example, a state in which a variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. Means a display state when at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure change display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure change display game changes a plurality of pieces of identification information in each of the left, middle, and right change display areas on the display device for a predetermined time. After displaying, if the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the condition of the special result mode (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, at the time when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, a state in which any one of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same The state that has become the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and reach effects having different possibilities (different expected values) of deriving special result modes include a normal reach (N reach), a special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premium reach are set. Note that the expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. The reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit occurs). That is, the special display mode may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when the special result mode is lost). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices, and output the game machines. 10 overall control. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 has a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure change display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a change pattern (various types) in the special figure change display game. A random number generating circuit for generating a random number of a fluctuation pattern for determining a reach or non-reach variable display game (including an execution time of a variable display game), a hit random number for determining a hit of a normal map variable display game, and the like. And a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit to the CPU 111A based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. I have.

  Further, in the process related to the special figure change display game, the CPU 111A acquires any one change pattern table from the plurality of change pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure change display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure change display game as the current game state, and the current game. Based on the operating state (time saving operation state) of the normal fluctuation prize device 37 as the state, the number of stored memories, and the like, any one of the plural fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired. Here, when executing the special figure change display game, the CPU 111A forms a change distribution information obtaining unit that obtains any one change pattern table from among a plurality of change pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, drives a payout motor of a payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, and displays a prize ball. Control for paying out is performed. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball loan request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball rental.

  Various switches and sensors are connected to the input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111. Interface chips (proximity I / Fs) 121a and 121b which receive negative logic signals such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches and convert them to positive logic signals of 0V-5V. Is provided. The proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b have an input range of 7V to 11V, so that leads of sensors and proximity switches are short-circuited incorrectly, sensors and switches are disconnected from connectors, and leads are disconnected. Thus, an abnormal state such as floating can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

  The proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b include a PB input mode switching gate switch 96a in the PB input mode switching gate 96, a gate switch 34a in the general-purpose starting gate 34, a winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35, and a first special. A lower winning port switch 38a in the variable winning device 38, an upper winning port switch 39a in the second special variable winning device 39, a variable operating region switch 38d provided in the variable operating region 38h in the first special variable winning device 38, Detects a game ball that has not flown into the positive variable operation area 38h in the first opening winning switch 36a, the first opening switch 36a in the normal variable winning device 37, the first opening switch 36a in the normal variable winning device 37, and the first special variable winning device 38. Passage switch 38g, discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting game balls discharged from the first special fluctuation winning device 38, Board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the firing of a radio wave are connected.

  The outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b are supplied to the second input port 123 and the third input port 124, and are read into the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Note that, among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the PB input mode switching gate switch 96a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the lower winning opening switch 38a, the upper winning opening switch 39a, the variable operation area switch 38d, The detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are input to the second input port 123.

  Also, among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the passage opening switch 38g, the discharge confirmation switch 38e, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62, and the abnormality detection signals 1 and 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected. Is input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a fraudulent detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (provided on the front frame 12). A signal output based on the detection of the radio wave by the provided frame radio sensor) and a payout busy signal (a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 is ready to accept a command) are also input. .

  Further, of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the output to the second input port 123 and the output of the passage port switch 38g among the outputs to the third input port 124 are transmitted from the main board 100 to the relay board 70. It is also supplied to a test firing test device (not shown) through the apparatus. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the second input port 123 and the gaming microcomputer 111. .

  As described above, the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b have a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b in addition to a voltage of, for example, 5 V required for normal operation of the IC from the power supply device 400. It has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 to assert (change to an effective level) the enable signal CE2. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and a first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also includes a payout abnormality status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormality) from the payout control device 200, a shot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout), and an overflow switch signal (down). A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of the game balls are stored in the plate 23 (a full state), a touch switch signal (a signal based on an input of a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). ) Is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 and a first input port 122 is provided. The first input port 122 has a detection signal of a glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a body frame opening detection provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. The detection signal of the switch 64 is also input.

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit on the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. The reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in a port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test test apparatus. It is configured as follows. Further, the configuration may be such that the reset signal RESET can be output to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to each of the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication route from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that the one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test shooting test device of the accredited institution (not shown), a signal indicating the jackpot probability state, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass production sale product) installed in a game store. A detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a start-up switch, output from the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b is supplied to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, a detection signal which cannot be supplied to the test shooting test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 or the board radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. The data signal is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state is not possible. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for taking in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting a signal line of a detection signal of the switch without passing through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  The output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and has a lower special winning opening solenoid 38b for opening the first special variable winning device 38, an upper large winning opening solenoid 39b for opening the second special variable winning device 39, and a normal variable. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting operation data of a general-purpose solenoid 37c for opening the winning device 37 and a lever solenoid 38f for operating a lever member 38i in the first special variable winning device 38. The output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of a segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 for outputting on / off data of a digit line (common line) to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected is provided.

  Further, the output section 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal plate 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (a hall computer)) installed in a game arcade. It can be supplied to an external device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a firing permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 includes a lower winning port solenoid 38b output from the second output port 134, an upper winning port solenoid 39b, an ordinary variable winning device 37c, a general-purpose solenoid 37c for opening, and a first special variable winning device 38. A first driver (drive circuit) 138a that receives and outputs an operation data signal of a lever solenoid 38f that operates a lever member 38i inside the first driver (drive circuit) 138a, and a current of the collective display device 50 output from a third output port 135 A second driver 138b for outputting an on / off drive signal for the supply-side segment line, and a third driver for outputting an on / off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136. The driver 138c removes an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device. The fourth driver 138d is provided for outputting to the information terminal plate 71.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so as to drive a solenoid operated at 32V. In addition, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  The dynamic driving method is achieved by applying a current to the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line by the second driver 138b outputting 12V, and extracting the current from the cathode terminal via the segment line by the third driver 138c outputting the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in the above, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 like a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the winning port switch 35a, the lower large winning port switch 38a , The big win switch 39a, the variable operation area switch 38d, the discharge confirmation switch 38e, and the passage switch 38g in the first special variable winning device 38 are provided with coils for magnetic detection. A non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter, referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by using a phenomenon in which a game ball changes is used. The glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 and the like include micro switches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC), like the game microcomputer 111, and a display for controlling the display of the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. The apparatus includes a device control circuit 312 and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs to be executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a clock unit that generates information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, and the like) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect contents, instructs the display device control circuit 312 to display contents, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to play sound, and turns on the decoration lamp. Executing processes such as drive control of the motor and the solenoid and management of the production time.

  A sound ROM 327 in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 includes an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Through this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the fluctuation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are converted into the production control command signal (production command). ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. I have.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), the front frame 12 and the like. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, and provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling the board effect device 44 (for example, a movable role or the like that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 312, 332 to 334 for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, a solenoid, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. In addition, a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating an effect device) is provided on the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15, and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device is provided. You may have.

  Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the effect button 25, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the input and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for detecting the detection signal and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor and a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and to electronic components controlled by the same. In addition to DC32V, a display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, a DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, a DC5V for a power supply voltage of a command I / F 331, and a DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker are generated. It is configured to Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC-DC for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, the display control circuit 312, the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, and the like are output from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from the launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of directional change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and a general-purpose starting gate 34, a general winning opening 35 The player wins the start winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the lowermost portion of the gaming region 32 to play the gaming region. 32. When the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, or the second special variable winning device 39, the number according to the type of the winning opening. Is discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15 from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 5).

  A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 5) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball passing through the general-purpose starting gate 34 is provided in the general-purpose starting gate 34, and a game area 32 is provided. When the game ball hit inside passes through the ordinary start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the general figure starting gate 34, the general figure starting memory number is an upper limit number (for example, four If it is less than ()), the number of ordinary figure start storages is added (+1) and one ordinary figure start memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The stored number of the general-purpose start winning prize is displayed on the general-purpose display 75 of the collective display device 50. In addition, a random number value for hit determination (hit random value) for determining the result of the general-figure variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored in the general-figure start memory. It is supposed to be.

  Then, when there is a general-figure start memory and the general-figure fluctuation display game can be started, that is, when the general-figure fluctuation display game is not being executed and the general-figure fluctuation display game hits, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is changed to the open state. If the hit state is not the hit state, the random number for hit determination stored in the first map stored in the first place is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine a hit in the first game. Then, a process of starting the normal figure change display game is performed. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the general-figure variation display game wins, and a specific result mode (general-figure specific result) is derived.

  In addition, the game control device 100 determines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns for a predetermined variation time on the general-purpose display 74 provided in the collective display device 50 as a process of executing the general-purpose variation display game. After the display during the general figure change, which is repeatedly displayed in the given order, is performed, a process for displaying the general figure change display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed. It should be noted that the general-purpose display 74 is constituted by the display device 41, and for example, a number, a symbol, a character design, or the like is used as the normal identification information, and after the display is fluctuated for a predetermined time, the display is stopped and the result is displayed. You may comprise.

  In the case where the result of the normal symbol change display game is a hit, a lighting pattern that is either a first stop symbol or a second stop symbol that forms a special result mode is displayed on the general symbol display 74 in accordance with the type of the hit. In addition to the stop display, the control is performed to open the movable member 37b of the ordinary fluctuation winning device 37 for a predetermined time by operating the general-purpose solenoid 37c. That is, the game control device 100 forms a conversion control execution unit that performs conversion control of the conversion member (the movable member 37b). When the result of the general-floor variation display game is out of control, control is performed on the general-purpose display 74 to display a lighting pattern as a result mode of the out-of-position.

  The winning ball in the starting winning port 36 and the winning ball in the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by a starting port 1 switch 36a and a starting port 2 switch 37a respectively provided therein. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning in the start winning port 36 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). At the same time, the second start memory, which is the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning in the ordinary variable prize device 37, is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). Based on the winning in the starting winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37, a big hit random number, a big hit symbol random value, and each fluctuation pattern random value are extracted as the starting storage information, respectively. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start memory or the second start memory. The number of the start memories is displayed on the special figure 1 reservation display 54 and the special figure 2 reservation display 55 of the collective display device 50, and is also displayed as a decorative special figure start storage display at a predetermined position of the center case 40. Is done.

  Then, when the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is ready to be started, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores the information in the first start memory corresponding to the special figure variable display game to be started. Processing such as comparing a big hit determination random value with a determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine a hit or miss of the special figure change display game is performed. Further, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure variable display game to be executed.

  Then, when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 1 display 51 (variable display device) for a predetermined variable time. After the special figure 1 changing display is performed, a process of displaying the special figure 1 changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed. When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 2 display 52 (variable display device) for a predetermined variable time. After the special figure 2 changing display is performed, a process of displaying a special figure 2 changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed.

  In the effect control device 300, based on a control signal from the game control device 100, a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numerals, symbols, and the like) are displayed on the display device 41 (variable display device) corresponding to the special figure variable display game. Is performed to display a decoration special figure fluctuation display game in which is displayed. Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of setting an effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes effect control means for controlling effects relating to a game (such as a variable display game).

  In the decorative special figure change display game on the display device 41, for example, the decorative special design (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers and the like on the display device 41 is displayed in the left change display area (first special design) and the right change display area ( In each of the second special symbol) and the medium fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is displayed at a speed that is difficult to identify (high-speed fluctuation). Then, the symbols fluctuating after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, the middle fluctuation display area, and stopped in each of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. This is performed by displaying the result of the special figure change display game in a result mode constituted by the displayed identification information. Further, in the display device 41, various effect displays such as changes in display colors and change modes are performed to enhance interest.

  Then, when the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the lighting pattern as a special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, and A process for generating a gaming state is performed. In addition, the result mode of the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device 41 corresponding to this also becomes the special result mode.

  In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 causes the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b to open the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 so that the game ball flows into the lower special winning opening. And the opening of the opening / closing door 39c of the second special variable winning device 39 by means of the upper winning prize opening solenoid 39b, so as to allow the game balls to flow into the upper winning prize opening. Then, until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls is won in the special winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses after opening of the special winning opening, a special winning opening is achieved. Is defined as one round, and the control (cycle game) of continuing (repeating) this a predetermined number of rounds is performed. That is, the game control device 100 forms a special winning opening opening / closing control unit that controls opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result mode is the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result mode of the out of control on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

  In addition, when a game ball flows into the positive change operation area 38h of the first special variable winning device 38 in a specific round, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state. ing. The high probability state is a state where the probability of a special result in the special figure change display game is higher than the normal probability state. Further, even if the high probability state is established based on the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not changed. Both are in a high probability state.

  Further, based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state, normal figure high probability state) as the game state after the end of the special game state. In this time-saving state, the probability of becoming a winning result of the general-floor variation display game (general-figure probability) is set to a high probability (general-figure high-probability state) higher than 0 which is a normal probability (general-figure low-probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is controlled so as to be longer than the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the low probability state in the ordinary figure.

  For example, in the time reduction state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-mentioned general-purpose variable display game (the general-purpose variable display time) to be the second variable display time shorter than the first variable display time. Further, in the time reduction state, it is possible to control the general stop time for displaying the result of the general change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time. Further, in the time-saving state, when the normal fluctuation display game is a hit and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal electric power opening time) is longer than the first opening time in the normal state. 2 It is possible to control the opening time. Further, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the number of times of opening of ordinary power) is set to the second number of times of opening which is larger than the first number of times of opening per game result of the ordinary figure changing display game. Can be set to Further, in the time reduction state, the probability of being a hit result of the general-figure variation display game (general probability) is a high probability (for example) 250/251 higher than the low probability (for example, 0/251) in the normal operation state. It is possible.

  In the time-saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is set to the open state by changing one or more of the general figure fluctuation time, the general figure stop time, the number of the general public opening, the general electric opening time, and the general probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states different from each other. In the present embodiment, the setting is made such that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operation state (the general probability is 0). Further, when a hit occurs, one of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

  Note that the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display. However, each special figure change display may be performed independently or not simultaneously. The game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use different display devices or different display regions for the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, or may use the same display device or display region. It is good, but the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed independently and not simultaneously. In addition, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may not be provided in the gaming machine 10, and the special figure change display game may be executed only by the display device 41. The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are executed in the order of occurrence of the start memory. In the description of the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

  7 and 8 show the operation of the first special fluctuation winning device 38 and the second special fluctuation winning device 39 in the special game state. There are five types of special results, 12R probability change, 5R probability change, 5R normal, 4R probability change, and 4R normal, and are selected based on the big hit symbol random numbers. The number of each jackpot type indicates the number of rounds, and the probability change indicates that a game ball is likely to flow into the probability change operation area 38h and is likely to be in a high probability state (probable change state) after the end of the special game state. This indicates that it is unlikely that a game ball will flow into the probable change operation area 38h and is unlikely to enter the high probability state (probable change state) after the end of the special game state. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, whether or not a high probability state is established is determined by whether or not a game ball flows into the positive variation operation area 38h. If the game ball does not flow into the high probability state, the game does not enter the high probability state.

  FIG. 7 shows an opening mode in each round of each big hit type. The details of the opening mode are shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the 12R probability change, a lower V release for opening the first special variable winning device 38 is performed in the first round. The lower V opening is an opening mode in which there is a high possibility that a game ball flows into the certain variation operation area 38h. In the second and subsequent rounds, upper long opening to open the second special variable winning device 39 and lower long opening to open the first special variable winning device 38 are alternately performed. Similarly, in the case of the 5R probability change and the 4R probability change in which the jackpot type is the probability change, the lower V release for opening the first special fluctuation winning device 38 is performed in the first round. In the case of 5R regular and 4R regular where the type of the big hit is normal, a lower short opening for opening the first special variable winning device 38 is performed in the first round. The lower short opening is an opening mode in which the possibility that a game ball flows into the positive change operation area 38h is lower than the lower V opening.

  Since the first special variable prize device 38 and the second special variable prize device 39 are opened alternately in any of the jackpot types, a predetermined openable time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls win. When the predetermined interval time elapses after the end of the round, the other special variable prize winning device is opened. It is to be noted that only the lower V opening and the lower short opening performed in the first round are allowed to allow the game ball to flow into the certainty changing operation area 38h. Since the upper long opening and the upper short opening open the second special variable prize winning device 39, there is no possibility that the game ball flows into the certainty variable operation area 38h. In addition, when the lower long opening and the lower short opening other than the first round are performed, the lever member 38i is not operated, so that there is no possibility that the game ball flows into the positive change operation area 38h. That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the specific round, which is a round in which a game ball may flow into the probable operation area 38h forming the specific area, is the first round. Of course, this specific round may be a round other than the first round.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, in the upper long opening, the second special variable prize winning device 39 is opened at the start of the round (t11), and the openable time of 25000 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9). If any of the conditions for winning the game ball is satisfied, the second special variable winning device 39 is closed and the round is ended (t12). Thereafter, the interval time and the processing time of the upper winning prize winning port remaining ball are started (t12), and when the interval time ends, the next round is started (t13). In the case of the last round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in the special game state, the first special variable prize device 38 and the second special variable prize device 39 are alternately opened, so that the first special variable prize device with the elapse of the interval time. Although the device 38 is opened, the second special variable prize winning device 39 continues the upper prize winning port remaining ball processing time. The lower short release shown in FIG. 8B is the same as the upper long release except that the openable time and the interval time are different.

  As shown in FIG. 8C, when the lower V is released, the first special variable winning device 38 is released at the start of the round (t31). Further, at the start of the round, the lever solenoid 38f is turned ON, and the positive-variable operation area switch 38d is made effective. When the lever solenoid 38f is OFF, the lever member 38i covers the probable operation area 38h so that game balls cannot flow in. When the lever solenoid 38f is on, the lever member 38i retreats from the probable operation area 38h. It becomes a state in which game balls can flow. The state in which the certainty-variable operation area switch 38d is valid is a state in which detection of a game ball by the certainty-variable operation area switch 38d is treated as valid. On the other hand, the state in which the probable variable operation area switch 38d is invalid is a state in which even if the game ball is detected by the probable variable operation area switch 38d, it is treated as invalid.

  The lever solenoid 38f is turned off when 64 ms elapses from the start of the round (t32). Then, when 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the positive-variable operation area switch 38d becomes invalid (t33). That is, there is a possibility that a game ball that has won a prize immediately after the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened flows into the positive variation operation area 38h.

  When 200 ms elapses from the start of the round, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is closed (t34). After the lapse of 2700 ms, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened again (t35), and the condition that either the opening time of 25000 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins is determined. When it is established, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round is ended (t39). Thereafter, the interval time and the processing time of the lower winning a prize opening ball are started (t39), and when the interval time ends, the next round is started (t41).

  After the second opening of the first special fluctuation winning device 38 (t35), the lever solenoid 38f is also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). Further, the probable change operation area switch 38d is also enabled (t36). The second opening of the first special fluctuation winning device 38 is for a sufficiently long time, and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f continues for a long time, so that the game ball almost certainly flows into the positive variable operation area 38h. It will be. Therefore, when the type of the big hit is certain, the high probability state is almost certainly attained.

  Further, the lever solenoid 38f can be kept ON for a predetermined time after the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43), and flows into the first special variable winning device 38 immediately before closing. It is possible for the game balls that have flowed into the probable change operation area 38h. Note that the first special variable prize device 38 is closed when the openable time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game balls that have won the first special variable prize device 38 are processed into the lower large winning opening residual ball processing. If all of them are discharged within the time, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off at the end of the remaining ball processing time (t42), the operation is ended, and the variable operation area switch 38d is invalidated.

  Further, when the openable time elapses or when a predetermined number of game balls win, the first special variable winning device 38 closes, and all the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are discharged within the remaining ball processing time. If it is not performed, and all of the lever solenoids 38f are discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43), the lever solenoid 38f is turned off when the discharge is completed, and the operation is terminated. , The probable change operation area switch 38d becomes invalid.

  In addition, the elapse of the openable time or when a predetermined number of game balls win, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are processed into the lower large winning opening remaining ball processing time. If not completely discharged by the end of the period during which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43), the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43) With this, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the operation is completed. In this case, after 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t43), the positive-variable operation area switch 38d becomes invalid (t44).

  As shown in FIG. 8D, in the lower short opening, the same opening as the first opening of the first special fluctuation winning device 38 in the lower V opening is performed (t51 to t54), and based on the completion of the opening. The round ends (t54). Since the opening of the first special fluctuation winning device 38 is for a very short time and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f is also for a short time, there is a low possibility that a game ball will flow into the positive variable operation area 38h. Therefore, when the jackpot type is normal, it is rare to be in a high probability state.

  Note that the operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the switching of the valid / invalid operation area switch are performed in the same manner as when the lower V is released as long as the game ball remains in the first special variable winning device 38 (t55). To t63). Therefore, if the game ball remains in the first special variable winning device 38 even after the processing time of the lower winning prize opening remaining ball processing time has elapsed, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off when the discharge of the remaining ball is completed. As a result, the operation is terminated, and the probable change operation area switch 38d is invalidated. If all the game balls have not been ejected by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on (t62), the lever solenoid 38f is turned off at the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on (t62). Then, the operation ends and the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t62), and after 100 ms elapses, the positive-variable operation area switch 38d becomes invalid (t63).

  However, when the lower short circuit is opened, the lever solenoid 38f and the positive change operation area switch 38d are controlled as shown in FIG. 4D only when the lower short circuit is opened in the first round. When the lower short is opened in other rounds, the lever solenoid 38f is not operated, and the positive-variable operation area switch 38d remains invalid. In the case of the last round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (e), in the lower long opening, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened at the start of the round (t71), and the openable time of 25000 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9). When any of the conditions for winning the game ball is satisfied, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed to end the round (t72). After that, the interval time and the processing time for the lower winning a prize port remaining ball are started (t72), and when the interval time ends, the next round is started (t73). In the case of the last round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set. When the lower long opening is performed, the lever solenoid 38f is kept in the OFF state, and the positive-variable operation area switch 38d is also kept invalid.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 14 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, first, a process for inhibiting an interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then, when an interrupt occurs, a value of a register or the like is saved at a start address of an area for saving. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the higher order. In step S4, the leading 00h is set. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step S5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop firing, and the firing of game balls is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with an instruction from the game control device 100 serving as the main control means is executed. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up. Can be prevented from dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It forms a waiting means for setting a waiting time.

  The timing of the power-on delay timer is performed using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not a target of validity determination) of the RAM that is not a target of validity determination (calculation of a checksum). Accordingly, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to calculate the check data excluding a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that the initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 can be reliably performed. Can be detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the elapse of the standby time, the initialization switch 112 is operated after the elapse of the standby time, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on until the elapse of the standby time. You need to keep doing it. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, even if such a troublesome operation is not performed, the operation can be detected immediately after the power is turned on, and the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on can be detected. Can be prevented.

  After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (Step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (Steps S8 to S12) are performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via a port and a data bus to set the number of times of checking (for example, two times) (step S8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (Step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game machine waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately cope with a failure at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 forms a power failure monitoring unit that monitors the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. Thus, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 serving as the main control unit is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a malfunction when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the storage contents at the time of the previous power-off are retained, so backup processing and the like are performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and whether the timer value is 0 is determined. Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the standby time has expired, access to a readable and writable RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or an EEPROM is permitted (step S13). ), And outputs the OFF data to all output ports (sets no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port mounted in advance in the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15) and read first. It is determined whether the initialization switch has been turned on based on the state of the first input port 122 (step S16).

  If the initialization switch is OFF (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S17). If (Step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (Step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), a checksum calculation process of calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19), and the calculated checksum and power-off time are determined. It is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process shifts to step S21 in FIG. 10 to perform a process in a case where the power supply has been normally restored. That is, the game control device 100 functions as a validity determination unit that determines the validity of predetermined data stored in the storage unit (RAM 111C) when the supply of power to the gaming machine is started.

  Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 10 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make

  In step S21 of FIG. 10, the initial value at the time of restoration from power failure is saved in an area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error monitoring. Note that the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 is capable of accepting the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. The state is undefined. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is changed to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined. Thereafter, an area for storing the game state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure change display game is the high probability state (step S22). If the special figure is not in the high probability (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S25. If the special map is in the high probability state (step S22; Y), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator, The ON (lighting) data of the third game state display section 78) is saved in the segment area (step S24). Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the process number prepared for rationally executing the later-described special figure game process is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S25), and step S31 is performed. Proceed to. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command (if a customer waits, a customer wait demonstration screen command, Then, send a plurality of commands such as a command on the recovery screen). That is, when the validity is confirmed by the validity determination means, the game is restarted based on the data stored in the storage means.

  On the other hand, if the process jumps from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to be permitted to access (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in an area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demonstration area and an area related to the setting of the effect mode. Then, a command for initializing the RAM is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed, and a predetermined time ( For example, a command for notifying the RAM initialization by light and sound (for 30 seconds) is transmitted.

  In step S31, a process of activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the game microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the frequency-divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Further, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a jackpot random number) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing the extracted random number as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). Is a pattern that determines By exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. Note that the bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be allowed to set arbitrarily.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted, and various initial value random numbers corresponding thereto (in the case of the present embodiment, a random number for determining a hit symbol of a special figure) Save the initial value (start value) of the (big hit symbol random number), the random number that determines the hit of the ordinary symbol (hit random number), and the random number that determines the hit symbol of the ordinary symbol (hit symbol random number) in a predetermined area of the RWM. Then (step S33), the interruption is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, making it difficult for the player to obtain an unauthorized random number.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step S35) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, big hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number is configured to be generated using a random number generated in the random number generation circuit. I have. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are timer interrupts which are processing units of the program. This is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process) having the same cycle as the process. For the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, a so-called “initial value changing method” is used in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes round. I have. Each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random-type update in which all values in a range appear randomly without duplication until one cycle. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the hit random number, and the symbol random number are updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number updating process in step S35, the number of times (for example, two times) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S36). It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the check of the power failure monitoring signal (loop process) are repeatedly performed. By permitting an interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number updating process (step S35), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the timer interrupt is executed. Is kept waiting by the initial value random number update process, thereby avoiding pressure on the interrupt process.

  In addition, the initial value random number updating process in step S35 may be a method of performing an initial value random number updating process in a timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid the execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed and only the main process is performed, there is no problem if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number update process, so that the main process It has the advantage of being simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal has been ON for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S39) is performed. The process of outputting the off data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

  Then, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process of calculating a checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off (step S43) and a process of saving the calculated checksum (step S44), a process of prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45). ), And then wait for the power of the gaming machine to be turned off. Thus, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power-off, it is possible to determine whether or not the information stored in the RWM before the power-off is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in general and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means ), The main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control apparatus when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time.

  In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured such that the RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit Initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C, and reads the operation state of the initialization means before the start of the standby time.

  In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the elapse of the standby time.

  FIG. 11 shows the type of the model designation command which is one of the commands transmitted in step S25 and step S30. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a model type A is used as a plurality of model types having different control contents such as the probability of a big hit, the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in a time saving state, the big hit type, the distribution, and the distribution of the effect. ~ D. Further, each model type includes a plurality of types having different model names. For example, the model type A includes three types of model names A-1, A-2, and A-3.

  In the game control device 100, any one of the plurality of model types is set, and any one of the plurality of model names included in the model type is set. . The model designation command differs depending on the model type and the model name. When the power is turned on, the model designation command corresponding to the model type and the model name set in the game control device 100 is transmitted to the effect control device 300. .

  The effect control device 300 can recognize the model type and model name set in the game control device 100 based on the received model designation command. Then, a default symbol corresponding to the received model designation command is displayed on the display device 41. Thus, by checking the display on the display device 41 when the power is turned on, the model type and model name of the model can be checked.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the command is composed of MODE and ACTION, and in the model designation command, a value indicating that MODE is a model designation command (here, 05H), and ACTION is determined according to the model type and model name. Value. For example, when the model type is A and the model name is A-1, a model designation command of MODE 05H and ACTION 61H is transmitted as a model designation command. Then, the effect control device 300 recognizes that the model type is A and the model name is A-1 based on the reception of the model designation command of MODE of 05H and ACTION of 61H, and displays it on the display device 41 as a default symbol. 131 is displayed.

  In the default symbol, since the upper two digits correspond to the model type and the lower one digit corresponds to the model name, the model type and the model name can be easily confirmed. Of course, the default symbols are not limited to those shown in FIG. 11, but can be set arbitrarily. However, a symbol (eg, 767) that is a combination of reach and a symbol (eg, 777) that is a combination of big hits may not be used. Further, the default symbol may be a symbol combination that can appear in the decorative special figure variable display game, or may be a symbol combination that does not appear in the decorative special figure variable display game. Further, each symbol included in the default symbol may be partially or entirely a symbol other than the identification information of the decorative special figure variable display game. Although the default symbol is a symbol corresponding to the model type and the model name, it may be a symbol corresponding to only one of the model type and the model name.

  Further, the second default symbol may be displayed after the default symbol corresponding to the model type and the model name is displayed for a certain period of time. The second default symbol may be of any type. For example, a common symbol may be used irrespective of the model type and the model name, and the same appearance may be applied to gaming machines of the same model but different model types. . Also, the second default symbol may be a common symbol for other models. Also, the second default symbol may be set at the game arcade.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 12 shows the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the above-described main process. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculation address (step S51), the number of repetitions is set (step S52), and "0" is set as the calculation value (step S53). . The number of bytes of the RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step S54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step S56), and the checksum is updated. It is determined whether the calculation has been completed (step S57). If the calculation is not completed (step S57; N), the process returns to step S54 and repeats the above processing. If the calculation has been completed (step S57; Y), the checksum calculation process ends.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 13 shows an initial value random number update process (step S35) in the above-described main process. In the initial value random number updating process, the jackpot symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61), the winning initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S62), and the winning symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S63). The initial value random number update processing ends. Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines a big hit stop symbol of the special figure change display game, and the “hit initial value random number” is a random number that determines a hit of the ordinary figure change display game. Is a random number which is an initial value of a random number for determining a hit stop symbol of the ordinary figure variation display game. In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be improved by continuing to increment the initial random numbers as long as time permits in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by a CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 14 is started.

  When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step S101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing register save processing for transferring a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main processing) to the RWM. Next, an upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, a D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches and fetching of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) are performed. Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (lower winning opening solenoid 38b, upper winning opening solenoid 39b, full power solenoid 37c, lever solenoid 38f) and the like. The processing (step S104) is performed. When the signal of the firing stop is output in step S5 in the main process, a signal of the firing permission is output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal is set to the enabled state. This firing permission signal is output to the firing control device via the payout control device. At this time, no processing of the signal or the like is performed. The firing permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the game control device, and the second signal (the firing permission signal) indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the payout control device is also the payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, two firing permission signals are output to the firing control device, and when both are permitted to fire, the game ball is configured to be ready to fire.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (Step S105) for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (Step S106), and a random number update process 2 (Step S107) are performed. After that, it is determined whether there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a shown in FIG. Winning port switch / status monitoring processing (step S108) for monitoring the status of the game and monitoring for errors (whether the front frame or the glass frame is open, etc.).

  Next, it is determined whether an abnormal discharge error is occurring (step S109). The abnormal discharge error means that the discharge from the upper flow path 38j is detected in spite of the fact that the game ball existing in the upper flow path 38j is 0, or the game ball existing in the lower flow path 38k is 0. Nevertheless, the discharge from the lower flow path 38k is detected (see FIG. 87). When an abnormal ejection error is occurring, an abnormal ejection error flag is set.

  If an abnormal discharge error is occurring (step S109; Y), the process proceeds to step S113. That is, the game is prevented from proceeding. If an abnormal discharge error is not occurring (step S109; N), a special figure game process (step S110) for performing a process relating to the special figure variation display game, S111), a segment LED editing process (step S112) for driving the segment LEDs provided in the gaming machine 10 for displaying the special figure variable display game and displaying various information related to the game so as to display desired contents.

  Next, abnormal discharge monitoring processing (step S113), illegal magnet monitoring processing for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (step S114), and detecting the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 A board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S115) for checking and determining whether there is any abnormality is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S116) for setting a signal to be output to various external devices in an output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt process ends. Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by the interrupt return. Automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step S103) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, in the input processing, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S121). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 1), the state of that bit is cleared (step S122).

  Subsequently, the state of the read input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S123), and the address of the input port 2, that is, the address of the second input port 123 is prepared (step S124). ), The address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S125). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared (step S126), and if there is an inverted bit in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data Is prepared (step S127), and a switch reading process (step S128) is performed. Here, in the present embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value to a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set to an RWM or another memory.

  Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the address of the third input port 124 is prepared (step S129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S130). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared (step S131), and if there is an inverted bit in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data Is prepared (step S132), switch reading processing (step S133) is performed, and the input processing is terminated.

  Unused bit data and inverted bit data are prepared for each input port. Therefore, although the unused bit data of the input port 2 prepared in step S126 and the unused bit data of the input port 3 prepared in step S131 are different data, the data may have the same value as a result. is there. The inverted bit data of the input port 2 prepared in step S127 and the inverted bit data of the input port 3 prepared in step S132 are different data, but as a result, the data may have the same value. is there.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps S128 and S133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 16, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S141). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of the bit is cleared (step S142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S143), and then the port input state of the target switch control area is set. Save (store) (step S144). Thereafter, it waits until a delay time (for example, about 100 μsec) elapses until the second reading (step S145).

  When the delay time has elapsed, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read for the second time (step S146). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S148), and the port input state of the target switch control area (step S148). The first data is loaded, and the inverted data (second data) is saved (stored) in the port input state (step S149). After that, in the first and second readings, a fixed bit pattern in which the same bit in the state is set to 1 and the different bit is set to 0 is created (step S150), and the logical product of the fixed bit pattern and the port input state is calculated. Bit (step S151).

  Next, an undefined bit pattern in which the same bit is set to 0 and the different bit is set to 1 in the first and second readings is created (step S152), and the logic between the undefined bit pattern and the determined state at the time of the previous interrupt is created. The product is taken and set as a previously held bit (step S153). This makes it possible to obtain the state of the signal from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like has been removed. Then, the currently determined bit and the previously held bit are combined, saved as the current determined state (step S154), exclusive ORed between the previous and current determined states, and saved as a rising edge (step S155). Then, the switch reading process ends.

  When a timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read once each time the interrupt is processed, and the signal is read by comparing the result with the result of the previous read. There is a method of determining whether or not the state has changed. However, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, a correct determination may not be performed. On the other hand, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment, the above-described problem can be avoided.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, in the output processing, first, off data is output (reset) to the output port 135 for outputting the data of the segment of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data to be output to the output port 134 for outputting the data of the lower winning port solenoid 38b, the upper winning port solenoid 39b, the ordinary solenoid 37c, and the lever solenoid 38f is synthesized and output (step S162).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the output data of the LED digit line corresponding to the digit counter value is obtained (step S163). S164). In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (step S165), and the combined data (eg, “door / frame open” data, “security signal” data) is output to a digit / external information output port. 136 (step S166).

  Then, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S167), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step S168). Thereby, the plurality of light emitting display units provided in the collective display device 50 are controlled by the dynamic control.

  Subsequently, various output data of the external information are combined (step S169), and the combined data (for example, the data of "big hit signal 1", the data of "big hit signal 2", the data of "big hit signal 3", and the "big hit signal 3" 4), the data of the "symbol determination frequency signal", the data of the "start-up opening signal", the data of the "main prize ball signal" and the output data of the firing permission (step S170). The output is output to the output port 137 for outputting the external information and the emission permission signal (step S171). Next, data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 for outputting a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S172). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S173).

  Next, data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 for outputting a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S174). Further, data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S175). Then, data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S176), the output process ends.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S105) in the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the payout command transmission processing, first, it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

  The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize to which a payout command has not been transmitted yet. Winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main prize ball signal to be output to an external device each time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). Winning data corresponding to a prize ball which is an area to be used and for which a main prize ball signal has not been generated is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, the payout control device 200 outputs a payout prize ball signal every time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By comparing these two signals, it is possible to monitor an illegal payout.

Each of the winning number counter areas has a winning number counter area according to the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (in the present embodiment, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and 14 winning balls). Is provided, and the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on winning in the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. Note that the winning number counter area 1 is assigned a larger area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, the transmission of the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination, and more untransmitted signals may be transmitted. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 winnings can be stored in each of the three winning ball counter areas, the ten winning ball counter areas, and the fourteen winning ball counter areas of the winning number counter area 1. Each of the three prize ball counter areas, the ten prize ball counter areas, and the fourteen prize ball counter areas in the winning number counter area 2 is configured to store up to 255 wins.

  In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181), “0” is set in the winning number counter area to be checked among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls. It is determined whether there is a count number that is not. If there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is determined whether the check of the count numbers of all the winning number counter areas is completed. A determination is made (step S183). If it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 to repeat the above processing. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter areas → 10 prize ball counter areas → 14 prize ball counter areas.

  If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 is updated. The number of payouts corresponding to the address is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the prize ball remaining area and the acquired payout number are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the prize ball remaining area (step S187). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction that is less than a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189). If the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step S189; N), the process proceeds to step S192. If the value is equal to or larger than 0 (step S189; Y), the value of the main award ball signal output count area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, each time the number of remaining prize balls reaches 10, the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal is updated by +1.
Then, the result of the subtraction is saved in the award ball remaining area (step S191), and the process returns to step S188. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls during a big hit or the like is concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed at the same time as the payout of the game balls, and the accurate It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of award balls cannot be counted.
Here, the processing of steps S181 to S191 is processing for updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal, and the processing of steps S192 to S201 is processing for transmitting a payout command.

  In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). If the payout command transmission timer is not “0” (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process ends. If the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is in a busy state (step S194).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control. Is done. In other words, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal forms a state signal indicating whether the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is busy (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. That is, in the present embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted every time the timer is interrupted, but a predetermined time has elapsed (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 can pay out the prize ball. When it is in the state, a payout command is transmitted. As described above, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command is not performed, so that the useless processing is performed. Prevention and reduce the burden of control.

  Conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the ON state (busy state) include, for example, during a payout operation, during a ball lending operation, during a shot ball out error, during an overflow error, during a frame radio wave illegal occurrence, during a payout ball detection switch (paid out). Counting the number of award balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 during an abnormality of a switch for monitoring a dropped ball, during an underpayment error, during an overpayment error (the number of unpaid award balls = the number of remaining game balls) ) (When it is not 0).

  If the payout busy signal is not busy (step S194; N), it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195), “0” is set in the winning number counter area to be checked among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls. It is determined whether there is a count number that is not.

  When there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is determined whether the check of the count numbers of all the winning number counter areas is completed. A determination is made (step S197). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and repeats the above processing. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter areas → 10 prize ball counter areas → 14 prize ball counter areas.

  If it is determined in step S195 that there is a count number (step S195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 is updated. Is acquired (step S199). Then, the acquired payout number command is written into the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 msec is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one prize in the prize area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the state signal output from the payout control unit (payout control device 200) indicating whether the payout control unit can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. Prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means when the prize ball command is issued.

  As described above, since the game control device 100 performs the control of transmitting the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, the prize is provided only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. A ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the prize that has not been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, It is possible to realize accurate payout control without having a function for performing the payout.

  In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in JP-A-2000-327759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control apparatus 200 backs up data in its own storage means, and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a backup function, which leads to an increase in cost. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized without having a function for backing up in the payout control device 200.

  Further, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The timing can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is performed in an integrated manner, and the prize areas (starting prize port 36, ordinary variable prize apparatus 37, general prize port 35, first special variable prize apparatus 38, Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the special variable winning device 39), and payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. And a payout control means (payout control device 200) for controlling the game, wherein the game control means outputs a state signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control. ), A control to transmit the prize ball command to the payout control means is performed, and when a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure, a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control means. And However, the award ball command is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is continuously output from the payout control means for a predetermined period. The ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

  In the game area 32, a plurality of prize areas having different numbers of prize balls (starting prize port 36, ordinary variable prize apparatus 37, general prize port 35, first special variable prize apparatus 38, second special variable prize apparatus 39) are provided. The game control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying, for each number of prize balls, whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of game balls has not been transmitted. When the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started and there is an untransmitted prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200). The state signal specifies whether or not the payout control means can start payout control before specifying whether or not each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command. Will be.

  In addition, the game control is performed as a whole, and a predetermined prize area (starting prize port 36, ordinary variable prize apparatus 37, general prize port 35, first special variable prize apparatus 38, second special variable prize apparatus 39) is controlled. Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on winning of a game ball, and payout control means (payout) for controlling payout of a game ball based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. Control device 200), and the game control means indicates that the state signal output from the payout control means and indicating whether the payout control means can start the payout control can start the payout control. And a prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means when the game ball is in play. Including prize ball An external information output means (game control device 100) for outputting the (main prize ball signal) to the outside of the gaming machine, wherein the external information output means outputs a state signal output from the payout control means, This means that the prize ball signal is output regardless of whether or not the payout control can be started.

  The prize-ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) immediately transmits the prize-ball command when the power failure occurs and the vehicle returns from the power failure, even if the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command is issued in response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that the information is transmitted to the payout control means.

  The game control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information related to a prize ball command, and a prize capable of storing information related to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and a prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) includes a predetermined prize area (starting prize port 36, ordinary variable prize apparatus 37, general prize port 35, first prize port 35, A prize ball command is generated in units of one prize to the special fluctuation prize device 38 and the second special fluctuation prize device 39), and when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, one prize ball is generated. The command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) can store the information of the prize in units of one prize in a predetermined prize area. And By updating when a game ball wins a fixed winning area and updating it in accordance with the transmission of the award ball command to the payout control means, the number of award ball commands not transmitted can be stored. The external information output means accumulates the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a predetermined prize area, and outputs a prize ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches the predetermined number. The prize ball signal counter is configured to be able to store the information of the prize in units of one prize in a predetermined prize area, and to update at the time of prize of the game ball to the predetermined prize area, By updating in accordance with the cumulative processing of the number of prize balls by the external information output means, it is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not yet been subjected to the cumulative processing.

[Random number update processing 1]
FIG. 19 shows a random number update process 1 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the jackpot symbol random number, the hit random number, and the initial value (start value) of the hit symbol random number, which are targets of the initial value random number update process. In the random number updating process 1, first, it is determined whether the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S211).

  When the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; N), it is determined whether the winning random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214). If the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; Y), the jackpot symbol random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S212), and the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number is corresponded. It is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding a start value of a random number counter (random number area) to be executed (step S213). Thereafter, it is determined whether the winning random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).

  If the hit random number in the ordinary figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; N), it is determined whether the winning symbol random number in the ordinary figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217). If the hit random number of the ordinary figure is waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; Y), the random number of the hit initial value is loaded as the next initial value (step S215). The value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S216). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the winning symbol random number in the ordinary figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).

  If the winning symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; N), the random number updating process 1 ends. If the winning symbol random number of the ordinary figure is waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; Y), the winning symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S218). The next initial value is set in the register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S219), and the random number update process 1 ends.

[Random number update processing 2]
FIG. 20 illustrates the random number update process 2 (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are a 1-byte random number (variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and a 2-byte random number (variable pattern random number 1) as the variable pattern random numbers. Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for the upper byte and the lower byte at different interrupts. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (the random number for determining the reach variation mode) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is configured to:

In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated as the target of the current update process is updated (step S231). In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the random number update scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. When the value of the random number update scan counter is “0”, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (upper) is updated, when it is “1”, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (lower) is updated, and when it is “2”, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (lower) is updated. The pattern random number 2 is updated, and when “3”, the variation pattern random number 3 is updated. Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232).
Next, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is obtained from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S234). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether the random number has completed one cycle.

  Subsequently, for example, the CPU used as the gaming microcomputer in the present embodiment is not provided with a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as “R register”) used for refreshing the DRAM, etc. Includes a counter called "M1 counter" which operates in the same way as the R register, but loads the value of the M1 counter (step S234). By using the value of the M1 counter, randomness can be given to random numbers. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is obtained, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S235). The mask value is different from the number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 Is updated in the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. When updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 as the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. When updating the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower byte of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

  Next, it is determined whether the updated random number area (random number counter) is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). If the random number area is the upper one byte of the two-byte random number (step S236; Y), the value remaining by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value of the upper one byte is used as the added value (hereinafter, this is referred to as “the additional value”). Is set to a masked value obtained by adding “1” to “masked value”, and the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step S237), and the process proceeds to step S239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value as an added value ( Step S238) and proceed to step S239. The reason why “1” is added to the masked value is that the masked value sometimes becomes “0”, and if “0” is added later, the value does not change from the value before the addition, so that it is avoided. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether the random number area to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239). If the random number area is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). ), And proceed to step S242. If the random number area to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), “0” is set as the upper one byte of the random number value, and the value (1) of the random number area to be updated is set as the lower one byte of the random number value. Byte) (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

  In step S242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S237 or S238 to the random number value is set as a new random number value, and it is determined whether the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S233 (step S242). S243). If the new random value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; N), the new random value is saved in a lower random number area of the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random number value is set as a new new random value (step S244), and this value is set to 1 It saves in the random number area below the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245).

Next, it is determined whether or not the updated random number area is a 2-byte random number (step S246). If the updated random number area is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number update process 2 ends. If it is a 2-byte random number (step S246; Y), a new random number value (if a new random number value is calculated again, the value is saved) in a random number area higher than the 2-byte random number (step S247). ), And terminates the random number update processing 2.
In the case of this embodiment, the upper limit judgment value, the mask value of the M1 counter, and the type information of the random number area to be updated (1 byte random number, 2 byte random number (upper), 2 byte random number (lower)) are stored in the rendering random number update table. , The address of the update area, etc., are defined for the type of random number to be updated (four blocks).

  As described above, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Accordingly, the CPU 111A determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game balls into the startup winning opening 36 and the startup area of the normal variation winning device 37. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for the purpose.

[Winning port switch / status monitoring processing]
FIG. 21 shows the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In the winning opening switch / state monitoring process, first, a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the upper winning opening switch 39a in the upper winning opening (the second special variable winning device 39) is prepared (step S301). Even though the winning opening is not open, the illegal winning opening is monitored (step S302) to monitor whether there is an illegal winning in the upper winning opening and to detect a normal winning.

  The winning opening monitoring table includes a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input to a target switch, a lower address of illegal monitoring information, a lower address of an illegal winning number area, an illegal winning error notification command, an illegal winning error. The information on the upper limit of the number (the number of illegal occurrence determination) and the address of the winning opening switch table is defined. The winning table of the winning opening monitoring table includes, in addition to the number of times of monitoring (the number of switches), a monitoring switch bit, a lower address of the winning number counter area 1, and a winning number counter area 2 for each switch. The lower address information is defined. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared for each switch to be monitored.

  Thereafter, a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the lower winning opening switch 38a in the lower winning opening (the first special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and whether there is an illegal winning is monitored and a normal winning is performed. Is executed (step S304).

  Next, a winning port monitoring table of the winning port switch (starting port 2 switch 37a) in the public telephone (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (step S305), and it is monitored for an illegal winning and a normal winning is performed. The detected fraud & winning monitoring process (step S306) is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table for winning opening switches (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the winning opening switch 35a for the general winning opening 35) that can always win is prepared (step S307), and the winning counter is updated to update the winning number. The processing (step S308) is performed.

  Next, the status scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the switches and signals whose status is to be monitored and which of the signals is to be monitored this time is updated (step S309). In the case of the present embodiment, the status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, a gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting a state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) for determining whether an error has occurred or not is performed.

  In the case of this embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, and if the value of the state scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality output due to occurrence of disconnection of a switch connector or the like. Monitoring of the state based on the detection signal 1 is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, monitoring of the state based on the shot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is "2", monitoring of the state based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "3", monitoring of the state based on the dispensing abnormal status signal is set. You.

  Next, a gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting a state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter is prepared (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) for determining whether an error has occurred or not is performed.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 so that if the value of the state scan counter is “0”, it is based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch 63. When state monitoring is set and the value of the state scan counter is “1”, state monitoring based on a signal output from the body frame opening detection switch 64 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is “2”, monitoring of the state based on the frame radio signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “3”, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is performed. Is set.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S314). If the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the process proceeds to step S318. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315), and the gaming machine for determining whether an error has occurred or not is determined. A state check process (step S316) is performed.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, and if the value of the state scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of a switch disconnection or the like. Monitoring of the state based on the detection signal 2 is set. Note that the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 does not define the case where the status scan counter is "1" to "3".

  Thereafter, the payout control device 200 performs a payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking a payout busy signal indicating whether or not the payout control can be started, and proceeds to step S318. Note that the processing of steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated every timer interrupt is “0”, so that it is executed once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processing of steps S315 to S317 is performed every 16 ms.

  Next, V abnormal passage monitoring processing (step S318) for monitoring the detection of an abnormal input by the probable operation area switch 38d is performed, and remaining ball monitoring processing for monitoring game balls remaining in the upper flow path 38j (step S319). I do. Further, a discharge ball monitoring process (step S320) for monitoring game balls remaining in the lower flow path 38k is performed, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process ends.

[Illegal & winning surveillance processing]
FIG. 22 shows the fraudulent & winning monitoring process (steps S302, S304, S306) in the above winning port switch / status monitoring process. This fraudulent & winning monitoring processing is performed by the lower special winning opening switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper special winning opening switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39, and the starting 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37. This is the process performed for Regarding the first special variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39, and the normal variable winning device 37, it is easy to forcibly open the opening / closing member and insert a game ball to pay out a prize ball. Monitor fraud in addition to detection.

  In the fraud & winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch to be monitored for error is checked (step S321), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step S322). The irregularity monitoring period is a period in which the flag is set during the lower-level winning opening illegality monitoring period when the winning-monitoring switch to be monitored for error is the lower-large winning opening switch 38a. The upper winning award switch 39a is a period in which the flag is set during the upper winning award opening illegality monitoring period. This is a period other than a state in which the opening control of the ordinary variable prize device 37 is being executed based on the above.

  If it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; N), the process proceeds to step S332. If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the target unauthorized winning number is updated by +1 (step S324), and the updated unauthorized winning number is equal to or more than the monitoring target unauthorized occurrence determination number. It is determined whether there is (Step S325).

  In the case of the present embodiment, the number of unauthorized occurrence determinations is set to 5 irrespective of the type of winning opening switch to be monitored for error, but the number of unauthorized occurrences is defined differently for each type of winning opening switch. You can also. The reason why the determination number is set to five is that, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is changed to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the large winning opening, and the game ball is in the valid period of the large winning opening switch. This is to prevent a case where a prize is passed after passing or a noise is put on a signal from being judged to be improper, and that an error is not easily judged even if it is not improper.

  If the number of unauthorized winnings is not equal to or greater than the number of unauthorized occurrences to be monitored (step S325; N), a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330). If the number of unauthorized winnings is equal to or greater than the number of monitored fraud occurrences (step S325; Y), the number of unauthorized winnings is set to the number of fraudulent occurrences determined (step S326), and the initial value is set in the target fraud winning notification timer area. (For example, 60000 msec) (step S327). Next, a target fraudulent command is prepared (Step S328), a fraud prize occurrence flag is prepared as a fraud flag (Step S329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (Step S338). ).

  On the other hand, when it is not during the fraud monitoring period (step S322; N), a winning port monitoring table of the target winning port switch is prepared (step S330), and a winning number counter updating process for setting a winning ball (step S331). If the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S332). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0. If the value of the notification timer is not 0 (step S333; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step S333; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time has already expired, the target unauthorized release command is prepared (step S334), and the unauthorized winning release flag is set as the unauthorized flag. Prepare (step S335). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336).

  If the value of the notification timer has become 0 (step S336; Y), that is, if the value of the notification timer has become 0 in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of illegal winnings is cleared ( In step S337, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338). If the value of the notification timer is not the moment when the value of the notification timer has become 0 (step S336; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer has become 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is set as a target. The value is compared with the value in the invalid flag area (step S338).

  If the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338; Y), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area do not match (step S338; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step S339), and effect command setting processing is performed. (Step S340), the fraudulent & winning monitoring process is terminated. With the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an unauthorized winning error release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is released, and the start and end of the error notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning counter update process]
FIG. 23 shows the winning number counter updating process (steps S308 and S331) in the winning port switch / status monitoring process and the fraud & winning monitoring process described above. In the winning number counter updating process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening monitoring table (step S351), and it is determined whether there is an input (exactly, an input change) in the target winning opening switch. A determination is made (step S352).

  If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether the monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S362). When there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S353), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354). It is determined whether an overflow occurs (step S355). If no overflow has occurred (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). ). If an overflow has occurred (step S355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S354, the counter for the winning ball (payout command transmission) is updated. The counter size is 2 bytes (range 0-65535).

  After loading the value of the target winning number counter area 2 (step S357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S358), and it is determined whether or not an overflow occurs (step S359). If no overflow has occurred (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361). Then, it is determined whether the monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S362). If an overflow has occurred (step S359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S362). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S358, the counter for the main prize ball signal is updated. The counter size is 1 byte (range 0 to 255).

  If the monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (step S362; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352). If the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is completed. With the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the winning information is stored.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 24 shows the gaming machine state check processing (steps S311, S313, and S316) in the above described winning opening switch / state monitoring processing. In this gaming machine state check processing, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is obtained (step S371), and it is determined whether a signal to be monitored is on (step S372).

  Information corresponding to the status scan counter is defined in the status monitoring table (winning port switch / game machine status monitoring table prepared in the status monitoring process). This information includes, for example, the lower address of the head address of the state monitoring area, the lower address of the port input state area of the switch control area in which the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bit of the target signal, the signal ON judgment data, status off command (in the case of an error, an error notification end command is performed), status on command (in the case of an error, an error notification start command is performed), status off monitoring timer comparison value, status on monitoring timer Contains the comparison value.

  If the target signal is not on (step S372; N), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step S373), and a target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S374). Thereafter, the target state off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S375), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S379). The case where the target signal is not ON (step S372; N) is a state in which an error-related signal indicates that there is no error (normal), and a signal from the touch switch indicates that the touch is not performed. is there.

  On the other hand, when the target signal is ON (step S372; Y), a state ON flag is prepared as a state flag (step S376), and a target state ON command is acquired and prepared (step S377). Then, the target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is obtained (step S378), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S379). When the target signal is ON (step S372; Y), the error-related signal indicates an error (abnormal or illegal), and the signal from the touch switch indicates that the touch is performed. It is a state which shows.

  If the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state match (step S379; Y), that is, if the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382). Then, it is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383). When the value of the target signal control area does not match the state of the current signal (step S379; N), that is, when the state of the signal changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area ( Step S380). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step S381), the target status monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382), and it is determined whether the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S382). Step S383).

  If the value of the target state monitoring timer is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; N), the gaming machine state check processing ends. If the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; Y), the status monitoring timer is updated by −1, and the status monitoring timer is kept at the value of the comparison value −1 (step S384). The status flag thus set is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step S385).

  If the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (step S385; Y), the game machine state check processing ends. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step S385; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S386), and the production command setting processing is performed. (Step S387) to end the gaming machine state check processing. As a result, the state-off command prepared in step S374 or the state-on command prepared in step S377 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 25 shows the payout busy signal check processing (step S317) in the winning opening switch / state monitoring processing described above. In the payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S391). Note that the payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start the payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is ON (step S391; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S392), and an ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S393). It is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S391; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S394), and an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S395). It is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396). This makes it possible to check whether the same state continues for a plurality of timer interrupts.

  If the value of the busy signal state area does not match the state of the current signal (step S396; N), the state of the current signal is saved in the busy signal state area (step S397), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0. Then, the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399). When the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value set in step S393 or S395 (step S400). If the value is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; N), The payout busy signal check processing ends. If the value is equal to or more than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by −1, and the busy signal monitoring timer is kept at the value of the comparison value −1 (step S401), and prepared in step S392 or step S394. The state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S402), and the payout busy signal check processing ends.

  By this processing, the busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, the busy signal status is not changed immediately even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, and the busy signal status is changed when the changed state continues over the signal determination time, and And so on.

  Further, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and becomes an undefined state until any signal state continues for the signal determination time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and the vehicle recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200. In response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 being continuously output over a predetermined period, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 reliably receives the prize ball command and immediately recognizes that the payout process is possible, and then transmits the prize ball command, and performs the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command. Can be prevented from being inadvertent.

[V abnormal passage monitoring processing]
FIG. 26 shows the V-abnormal passage monitoring process (step S318) in the above-described winning opening switch / status monitoring process. In this V-abnormal passage monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the probable change operation area 38h is valid (step S411). The state in which the certainty-variable operation area 38h is valid is a state in which the detection of the game ball by the certainty-variable operation area switch 38d is treated as valid (see FIG. 8). If the certain variation operation area 38h is valid (step S411; Y), the process proceeds to step S418. If the certainty variable operation area 38h is not valid (step S411; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the certainty variable operation area switch (step S412).

  Then, when there is no input to the probable change operation area switch (step S412; N), the process proceeds to step S418. If there is an input to the probable variable operation area switch (step S412; Y), the processing related to the occurrence of the V abnormal passage error from step S413 is performed. The lever member 38i can flow into the probable operation area 38h only when the lever member 38i is retracted from the probable operation area 38h. The period during which the probable operation area switch 38d is effective starts when the lever member 38i is in the retracted state, and the game ball that has flowed in after the lever member 38i is in the state covering the probable operation area 38h is moved to the probable operation area. The process is terminated when a predetermined period of time sufficient to be detected by the switch 38d has elapsed, or when the lever member 38i is in a state of covering the positive change operation region 38h. Therefore, when the probable variable operation area switch 38d is not in effect, the fact that there is an input to the probable variable operation area switch 38d is an abnormal state that does not normally occur, and processing relating to the occurrence of a V abnormal passage error is performed.

  In the process relating to the occurrence of the V abnormal passage error, first, the initial value (here, a value corresponding to 60 seconds) is saved in the V abnormal passage notification timer area (step S413), and the value of the V abnormal passage flag area is set to the error occurrence flag. Is determined (step S414). Then, if the value of the V abnormal passage flag area is the error occurrence flag (step S414; Y), that is, if the error has already occurred, the V abnormal passage monitoring process ends.

  If the value of the V abnormal passage flag area is not an error occurrence flag (step S414; N), that is, if it is determined that an error has occurred in the current process, the error occurrence flag is saved in the V abnormal passage flag area ( In step S415, a V abnormal passage occurrence command is prepared (step S416). Thereafter, effect command setting processing is performed (step S417), and the V abnormal passage monitoring processing ends. The effect control device 300 performs a process of notifying an error with the reception of the V abnormal passage occurrence command.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S418, it is determined whether the V abnormality passage notification timer is 0 (step S418). If the V abnormal passage notification timer is 0 (step S418; Y), the V abnormal passage monitoring process ends. In this case, the V abnormal passage error is not occurring. If the V abnormal passage notification timer is not 0 (step S418; N), the V abnormal passage notification timer is updated by -1 (step S419), and it is determined whether the V abnormal passage notification timer has become 0 (step S420). ).

  If the V abnormal passage notification timer has not become 0 (step S420; N), the V abnormal passage monitoring process ends. In this case, the notification of the V abnormal passage error continues. When the V abnormal passage notification timer becomes 0 (step S420; Y), the normal flag is saved in the V abnormal passage flag area (step S421), and a V abnormal passage release command is prepared (step S422). . Thereafter, effect command setting processing is performed (step S423), and the V abnormal passage monitoring processing ends. The effect control device 300 performs a process of ending the error notification in response to the reception of the V abnormal passage cancellation command.

(Remaining sphere monitoring process)
FIG. 27 shows the remaining sphere monitoring process (step S319) in the winning port switch / status monitoring process described above. In the remaining ball monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the passage switch 38g for detecting a game ball that has not flowed into the certainty-variable operation area 38h (step S431). When there is no input to the passage switch 38g (step S431; N), the process proceeds to step S433. If there is an input to the passage switch 38g (step S431; Y), if the remaining ball counter for managing the number of game balls in the upper channel 38j is not 0, the counter is updated by -1 (step S432), and step S433 is performed. Move to

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the probable variable operation area switch 38d (step S433). If there is no input (step S433; N), the process proceeds to step S435. If there is an input to the probable variable operation area switch 38d (step S433; Y), if the remaining ball counter for managing the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is not 0, -1 is updated (step S434). The process moves to S435.

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the lower-large winning opening switch (step S435). If there is no input (step S435; N), the process proceeds to step S438. If there is an input to the lower large winning opening switch (step S435; Y), the remaining ball counter for managing the number of game balls in the upper channel 38j is updated by +1 (step S436), and the remaining ball monitoring timer area is set. The timer initial value is saved (Step S437), and the routine goes to Step S438. The remaining ball monitoring timer is for determining a remaining ball error when a game ball stays in the upper channel 38j for a long time. Here, as the initial value, a time that is sufficiently longer than the time required from flowing into the upper flow path 38j in a state where there is no abnormality and discharging from the upper flow path 38j is set. Here, since the value is updated by -1 in the following processing, it is set so that 3 seconds can be counted by saving a value of +1 corresponding to 3 seconds as an initial value.

  Next, it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step S438). If the remaining ball counter is 0 (step S438; Y), that is, if there is no game ball in the upper flow path 38j, the remaining ball counter is determined. An error release flag is prepared (step S444), a remaining ball error release command is prepared (step S445), and the routine goes to a step S446.

  On the other hand, if the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step S438; N), that is, if there is a game ball in the upper channel 38j, it is determined whether a remaining ball error is already occurring (step S439). If a remaining ball error has already occurred (step S439; Y), the remaining ball monitoring process ends. If a remaining ball error has not already occurred (step S439; N), the remaining ball monitoring timer is updated by -1 (step S440), and it is determined whether the remaining ball monitoring timer is 0 (step S441).

  If the remaining sphere monitoring timer is not 0 (step S441; N), the remaining sphere monitoring process ends. When the remaining ball monitoring timer is 0 (step S441; Y), a remaining ball error occurrence flag is prepared (step S442), and a remaining ball error occurrence command is prepared (step S443). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value of the remaining sphere error flag area (step S446).

  If the prepared state flag matches the value of the remaining ball error flag area (step S446; Y), the remaining ball monitoring process ends. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the remaining sphere error flag area (step S446; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the remaining sphere error flag area (step S447), and effect command setting processing is performed. Then (step S448), the remaining sphere monitoring process ends. The effect control device 300 performs a process of starting error notification based on the reception of the remaining ball error occurrence command, and performs a process of ending the error notification based on the reception of the remaining ball error release command.

  That is, by the above processing, if all the game balls have not been discharged from the upper channel 38j even if a predetermined time (here, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the inflow of the last game ball into the upper channel 38j, the remaining game balls remain. It is determined that a ball error has occurred. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an illegal act of, for example, leaving a game ball (line fishing ball) with a line remaining in the upper channel 38j.

(Ejection ball monitoring process)
FIG. 28 shows the discharge ball monitoring processing (step S320) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring processing. In the discharge ball monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to a discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting a game ball discharged from the lower channel 38k, that is, a game ball discharged from the first special variable winning device 38. (Step S451). If there is no input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S451; N), the process proceeds to step S453. If there is an input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S451; Y), if the discharge ball counter for managing the number of game balls in the lower flow path 38k is not 0, -1 is updated (step S452), and step S453 is performed. Move to

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the passage switch 38g for detecting a game ball that has not flowed into the certainty-variable operation area 38h (step S453). If there is no input (step S453; N), the process proceeds to step S456. I do. If there is an input to the passage opening switch 38g (step S453; Y), the discharge ball counter for managing the number of game balls in the lower flow path 38k is updated by +1 (step S454), and the timer is set in the discharge ball monitoring timer area. The initial value is saved (step S455), and the flow shifts to step S456.

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the certain-variable-operation-area switch 38d that detects a game ball that has flowed into the certain-variation-operation area 38h (step S456). If there is no input (step S456; N), the process proceeds to step S459. . If there is an input to the probable change operation area switch 38d (step S456; Y), the discharge ball counter for managing the number of game balls in the lower channel 38k is updated by +1 (step S457), and the discharge ball monitoring timer area is set. The timer initial value is saved (step S458), and the flow shifts to step S459.

  The passage opening switch 38g and the positive change operation area switch 38d also have a function as a switch for detecting a game ball flowing into the lower flow path 38k. Update and save the timer initial value in the discharge ball monitoring timer area. The discharge ball monitoring timer is for determining a discharge ball error when a game ball stays in the lower flow path 38k for a long time. Here, as the initial value, a time that is sufficiently longer than the time required from flowing into the lower flow path 38k and discharging from the lower flow path 38k without any abnormality is set. Here, since the value is updated by -1 in the following processing, it is set so that 3 seconds can be counted by saving a value of +1 corresponding to 3 seconds as an initial value.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the discharge ball counter is 0 (step S459). If the discharge ball counter is 0 (step S459; Y), that is, if there is no game ball in the lower channel 38k, the discharge ball is determined. An error release flag is prepared (step S465), a discharge ball error release command is prepared (step S466), and the routine goes to a step S467.

  On the other hand, if the discharge ball counter is not 0 (step S459; N), that is, if there is a game ball in the lower channel 38k, it is determined whether a discharge ball error has already occurred (step S460). If a discharge ball error has already occurred (step S460; Y), the discharge ball monitoring process ends. If a discharge ball error has not already occurred (step S460; N), the discharge ball monitoring timer is updated by -1 (step S461), and it is determined whether the discharge ball monitoring timer is 0 (step S462).

  If the discharge ball monitoring timer is not 0 (step S462; N), the discharge ball monitoring process ends. When the discharge ball monitoring timer is 0 (step S462; Y), a discharge ball error occurrence flag is prepared (step S463), and a discharge ball error occurrence command is prepared (step S464). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value of the ejected ball error flag area (step S467).

  When the prepared state flag matches the value of the ejected ball error flag area (step S467; Y), the ejected ball monitoring process ends. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the ejected ball error flag area (step S467; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the ejected ball error flag area (step S468), and effect command setting processing is performed. (Step S448), and the discharge ball monitoring process ends. The effect control device 300 performs a process of starting error notification based on the reception of the ejection ball error occurrence command, and performs a process of ending the error notification based on the reception of the ejection ball error release command.

  That is, by the above processing, if all the game balls have not been discharged from the lower flow channel 38k even if a predetermined time (here, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the inflow of the last game ball into the lower flow channel 38k, the discharge is performed. It is determined that a ball error has occurred. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an illegal act of, for example, leaving a game ball (line fishing ball) with a line remaining in the lower channel 38k.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, details of the special figure game processing (step S109) in the above-described timer interrupt processing will be described. In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the input of the start port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure change display game is controlled, and the display of the special figure is set.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure game process, first, a start-up switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring winning of the start-up 1 switch 36a and the start-up 2 switch 37a. In the starting port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the starting winning port 36 and the ordinary variable winning device 37 serving as the second starting port, various random numbers (such as a big hit random number) are extracted, and special features based on the winning are obtained. At the stage before the start of the figure change display game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which the game result based on the winning is determined in advance.

  Next, the upper winning port switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the upper winning a prize port switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the upper prize winning switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39 is performed. Further, the lower large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A3) is performed. In the lower special winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the lower special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is performed.

  Thereafter, a probable change operation area switch monitoring process (step A4) is performed. In the probable variable operation area switch monitoring processing, processing for monitoring detection of a game ball by the probable variable operation area switch 38d provided in the probable variable operation area 38h is performed. Next, a PB gate switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the PB input mode switching gate switch 96a provided in the PB input mode switching gate 96 is performed (Step A5), and a remaining ball processing timer updating process (Step A6) is performed. . In the remaining ball processing timer updating process, a process of managing the special winning port remaining ball processing time set after the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are closed is performed.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A7). Note that the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A8). When the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A8; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, reference is made to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A9), and the branch destination address of the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number is obtained using the table (step A10). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A11).

  In step A11, when the special figure game processing number is “0”, the start of the change of the special figure change display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of the change of the special figure change display game, the setting of the effect, and the change of the special figure change display game are performed. A special map ordinary process (step A12) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed. In step A11, if the special figure game processing number is "1", the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure displaying process, and the like. (Step A13) is performed.

  In step A11, if the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit and the big winning port of each big hit A special figure display process (step A14) for setting a fanfare time according to the opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing the process during the fanfare / interval, and the like is performed.

  If the special figure game processing number is “3” in step A11, the opening time of the special winning opening is set, the number of times of opening is updated, and information necessary for performing the special winning opening processing is set. Processing during the fanfare / interval (step A15) is performed. In step A11, if the special figure game processing number is "4", an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the last round, and an ending command is set if the big hit round is the last round. A special winning opening process (step A16) for setting information necessary for performing the ball processing is performed.

  In step A11, if the special figure game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the last round, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball in the big winning opening and the big hit end processing are performed. A special winning opening remaining ball process (step A17) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed. If the special figure game processing number is "6" in step A11, the big hit end processing (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure ordinary processing is performed.

  Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation control processing (step A20) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A21), a symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. Thereafter, a lever solenoid control process (step A23) for controlling the operation of the lever solenoid 38f is performed, a PB input command editing process is performed (step A24), and the special figure game process ends. On the other hand, in step A8, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not “0” (step A8; N), that is, if the time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processing is performed. Do.

[Start port switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the start-up switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, in the starting port switch monitoring process, first, a first starting port (start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed. It is determined whether or not there is a winning in the first starting port (step A103). If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the first starting port (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, in step A103, when it is determined that there is a prize in the first starting port (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not it is during special figure time reduction (general power support) (step A104). ).

  If it is determined in step A104 that the special figure is not working (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A104 that the special figure time reduction is in progress (step A104; Y), a right-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. . That is, in the case of the time saving state, a right-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure change display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) does not win unless the player has left-handed, and does not win the normal variable winning device 37 unless the player has right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, a right-handed game is more advantageous than a left-handed game. However, when the first starting port receives a prize during the time-saving state (that is, when a left-handed game is performed during the time-saving state). Is configured to transmit a right-turn instruction notification command to the effect control device 300, and to issue a notification (warning) to instruct the right control to be performed by the effect control device 300. Next, after preparing a table for setting the information of suspension by the first starting port (start winning port 36) (step A107), the special figure starting port switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

  Next, a prize monitoring table is prepared for the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A109), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether there is a prize in the second starting port. A determination is made (step A111). In step A111, when it is determined that there is no winning in the second opening (step A111; N), the start-up switch monitoring process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize in the second starting port (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (normal fluctuation prize device 37) is operating, that is, the normal fluctuation It is determined whether or not the winning device 37 is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (step A112), and if it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), the step is performed. The process proceeds to A114 to perform the subsequent processes. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not a regular electric fraud is occurring (step A113).

  In the determination as to whether or not an irregular fraud has occurred, it is determined that a fraud has occurred if the number of illegal winnings in the normal variable prize winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud occurrence determination number (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, a game ball cannot be won in a closed state, and a game ball can be won only in an open state. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud occurs, and when there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. If the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  In step A113, if it is determined that normal telephone fraud has not occurred (step A113; N), a table for setting information of suspension by the second starting port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is prepared (step A114). The startup port switch common process (step A115) is performed, and the startup port switch monitoring process ends. If it is determined in step A113 that irregularities in the ordinary telephone are occurring (step A113; Y), the start-up switch monitoring process ends. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described start-up switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, among the first starting port (starting winning port 36) and the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37), information on the non-winning of the starting port to be monitored is obtained. It is set (Step A121), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the monitored starting port switch among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a (Step A122). Then, when there is no input to the starting port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition processing ends. On the other hand, if there is an input to the start switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124). .

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the extracted big hit random number is loaded into the hard random number latch register to be monitored and prepared (step A125). Then, among the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (ordinary variable winning device 37), winning information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition processing is performed. finish.

[Common processing of special figure starting port switch]
Next, details of the special figure starting port switch common processing (steps A108 and A115) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring processing will be described. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process that is performed in common for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 32, in the special figure starting port switch common processing, first, information on the number of winnings to the monitored starting port switch among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is transmitted to the gaming machine 10 The start port signal output count, which is the number of outputs to the external management device, is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A133). ). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the starting port signal output number area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output count area. If the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, so that it is determined that the output count overflows and the update is not performed.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservations (starting storage) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit (step A135). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135; N), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends. In addition, when the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit value (step A135; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) is updated by +1 ( (Step A136), prepare a special entry figure holding number command corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number (step A137), and perform an effect command setting process (step A138).

  Next, the start-up winning flag of the target is saved (step A139), the address of the start-up switch to be monitored and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures are calculated (step A140), and prepared in step A125. The big hit random number thus saved is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM (step A141). Next, a jackpot symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A142), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A143).

  Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 are saved in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A144), and the address of the fluctuation order flag storage area corresponding to the sum of the special figure 1 reserved number and the special figure 2 reserved number is stored. Is calculated (step A145), and the target variation order flag is saved in the calculated area (step A146). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first start memory and the second start memory are digested in the order of occurrence, and the variable order flags are stored in the variable order flag storage areas 1 to 8 corresponding to the digestion order. Alternatively, the order of digesting the start-up memory is managed by storing the information of FIG. After that, the special figure holding information determination processing (step A147) for determining the information about the start memory before the start memory is exhausted is performed, and the special figure starting port switch common processing ends.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the flow of the game ball into the starting winning area of the starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and has the right to execute the variable display game. A start storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as start memory. In addition, the start storage means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) as a first start storage up to a predetermined number. Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure pending information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination processing (step A147) in the above-described startup port switch common processing will be described. The special figure suspension information determination processing is a look-ahead processing for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  As shown in FIG. 33, first, a low-probability determination flag is prepared for performing a determination based on a determination value in a low-probability state (step A151), and a prefetch big hit determination process is performed (step A152). If the result of the pre-reading big hit determination process is a big hit (step A153; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target opening switch is set (step A154), and the big hit symbol prepared in step A142. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is obtained (step A155), and the process proceeds to step A157. If the result of the pre-reading big hit determination process is not a big hit (step A153; N), that is, if the result is a loss, stop symbol information for the loss is set (step A156), and the process proceeds to step A157.

  Then, the stop symbol information is saved in the symbol information area (step A157), a look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the target opening switch and the stop symbol information is prepared (step A158), and the effect command setting process is performed. Is performed (step A159). Thereby, the determination result in the low probability state is transmitted to effect control device 300.

  Next, a high-probability determination flag is prepared for performing a determination based on the determination value in the high-probability state (step A160), and a prefetching big hit determination process is performed (step A161). If the result of the pre-reading big hit determination process is a big hit (step A162; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target opening switch is set (step A163), and the big hit symbol prepared in step A142. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is obtained (step A164), and the process proceeds to step A166. If the result of the pre-reading big hit determination process is not a big hit (step A162; N), that is, if it is a loss, the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A165), and the process proceeds to step A166.

  Then, it is determined whether the special figure high probability (high probability state) is in progress (step A166). If the special figure high probability is not in progress (step A166; N), the process proceeds to step A168. If the special figure is high (step A166; Y), the stopped symbol information is saved (overwritten) in the symbol information area (step A167), and the process proceeds to step A168. Thereafter, a look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target start switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A168), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A169). Thereby, the determination result in the high probability state is transmitted to effect control device 300.

  Next, special figure information setting processing (step A170) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed, and a fluctuation pattern setting processing for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed (step A170). A171). After that, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A172), and effect command setting processing is performed. (Step A173), the special figure suspension information determination processing ends. The special figure information setting processing in step A170 and the variation pattern setting processing in step A171 are the same as the processing executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure ordinary processing.

  With the above processing, the look-ahead stop symbol command including the result of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory of the prefetch target and the look-ahead fluctuation pattern command including the information on the fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory are generated. Prepared and transmitted to effect control device 300. As the prefetch stop symbol command, a command corresponding to each of the determination result in the low probability state and the determination result in the high probability state is transmitted. As a result, the determination result (pre-reading result) of the result-related information (whether a big hit or a variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is rendered before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. The display can be notified to the device 300. In particular, by changing the decoration special figure start storage display displayed on the decoration special figure start storage display part 42 of the center case 40, the start timing of the special figure change display game can be changed. It is possible to notify the player of the result-related information beforehand.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage device (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Judge whether or not). In addition, the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the start winning where the start memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Prefetch big hit determination processing]
Next, the details of the prefetching big hit determination process (steps A152 and A161) in the above-described special figure suspension information determination process will be described. As shown in FIG. 34, in the pre-reading big hit determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (step A181), and it is determined whether the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A182). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit determination value that is the lower limit value of the jackpot determination value and is equal to or less than the upper limit determination value that is the upper limit value of the jackpot determination value. , Is determined to be a big hit.

  If the value of the big hit random number is smaller than the lower limit judgment value (step A182; Y), a loss is set as the judgment result (step A187), and the prefetch big hit judgment processing ends. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (Step A182; N), it is determined whether the determination flag is a high probability determination (Step A183).

  If the determination flag is a high-probability determination (step A183; Y), an upper-limit determination value during high-probability is set (step A184), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper-limit determination value. (Step A186). If the determination flag is not a high probability determination (step A183; N), that is, if it is a low probability determination flag, an upper limit determination value during low probability is set (step A185), and the value of the target big hit random number is It is determined whether the value is larger than the determination value (step A186).

  If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A186; Y), a loss is set as the judgment result (step A187), and the prefetch big hit judgment processing ends. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A186; N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step A188), and the prefetch big hit judgment processing ends.

[Superior winning opening switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the big winning port switch monitoring process (step A2) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 35, in the upper special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “4”, that is, whether the special winning opening process is being performed (step A191). ). If the processing is being performed during the opening of the special winning opening (step A191; Y), the process proceeds to step A193. If the special winning game opening process is not being performed (step A191; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “5”, that is, whether the special winning game remaining ball is being processed (step A191). A192).

  If the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step A192; Y), the process proceeds to step A193. When the special winning game remaining ball is not being processed (step A192; N), the special figure game processing number does not shift to the next until the special figure game processing timer becomes "0". The progress of the game can be checked by the number.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the upper winning opening is in operation (step A193). The operation of the upper winning a prize port is a state in which the second special variable prize winning device 39 may detect a prize. The possibility of detecting a prize includes, in addition to a state in which the open / close door 39c is operated to enable a prize of a game ball to be in an open state, a predetermined period after being changed from an open state to a closed state. . If the upper winning a prize port is not in operation (step A193; N), the upper prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated. If the upper winning a prize port is in operation (step A193; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper prize winning switch 39a (step A194).

  When there is no input to the upper winning a prize port switch (step A194; N), the upper prize winning port switch monitoring process ends. If there is an input to the upper winning opening switch (step A194; Y), a winning opening count command is prepared (step A195), and an effect command setting process (step A196) is performed. This enables the effect control device 300 to execute an effect according to the winning in the second special variable winning device 39. Then, it is determined whether the processing is being performed during the opening of the special winning opening (step A197). If the processing is not being performed during the opening of the special winning opening (step A197; N), the upper winning opening switch monitoring process ends. If the special winning opening is being processed (step A197; Y), the special winning opening count is updated by +1 (step A198), and the special winning opening count is set to the upper limit value (possible in one round). It is determined whether or not the number of game balls (for example, "9") has been reached (step A199).

  If the special winning opening count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step A199; N), the upper special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. If the special winning opening count is equal to or more than the upper limit (step A199; Y), the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A200), and the upper special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. As a result, the second special variable winning device 39 is closed and one round is completed.

[Lower prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the lower big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A3) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 36, in the lower special winning opening switch monitoring processing, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “4”, that is, whether the special winning opening processing is being performed (step A201). ). If the special winning opening is being processed (Y in step A201), the process proceeds to step A203. When the special winning opening process is not being performed (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “5”, that is, whether the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step A201). A202).

  If the special winning port remaining ball is being processed (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A203. If the special winning game remaining ball is not being processed (step A202; N), the special figure game processing number does not shift to the next until the special figure game processing timer becomes "0". The progress of the game can be checked by the number.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the lower winning opening is being operated (step A203). The operation of the lower special winning opening is a state in which the first special variable winning device 38 may detect a winning. The possibility of detecting a prize includes, in addition to the state in which the opening and closing door 38c is operated and the game ball is in an open state in which a prize can be won, a predetermined period after being changed from the open state to the closed state. . If the lower special winning opening is not in operation (step A203; N), the lower special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. If the lower special winning opening is in operation (step A203; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower special winning opening switch 38a (step A204).

  If there is no input to the lower-winning prize port switch (step A204; N), the lower-winning prize port switch monitoring process ends. Further, when there is an input to the lower special winning opening switch (step A204; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A205), and effect command setting processing (step A206) is performed. As a result, it is possible for the effect control device 300 to execute an effect according to the winning in the first special variable winning device 38. Then, it is determined whether the processing is being performed during the opening of the special winning opening (step A207). If the processing is not being performed during the opening of the special winning opening (step A207; N), the lower winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the special winning opening is being processed (step A207; Y), the special winning opening count is updated by +1 (step A208), and the special winning opening count is set to the upper limit value (the winning in one round is possible). It is determined whether or not the number of game balls (for example, “9”) or more (step A209).

  If the special winning opening count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A209; N), the lower special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the special winning opening count is equal to or more than the upper limit value (step A209; Y), the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A210), and the special figure per end pointer area is changed from the special figure per end pointer area to the hit end pointer value. Is loaded in the middle control pointer area per special map (step A211), and the lower large winning opening switch monitoring process ends. As a result, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and one round is completed.

[Probable change operation area switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the probable change operation area switch monitoring processing (step A4) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 37, in the probable variable operation area switch monitoring processing, first, it is determined whether the probable variable operation area 38h is valid (step A221). The state in which the certainty-variable operation area 38h is valid is a state in which the detection of the game ball by the certainty-variable operation area switch 38d is treated as valid (see FIG. 8). If the certainty-variable operation area 38h is not valid (step A221; N), the certainty-variable operation area switch monitoring process ends. When the certainty-variable operation area 38h is valid (step A221; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the certainty-variable operation area switch (step A222).

  When there is no input to the certain-variable-operation-area switch (step A222; N), the processing for monitoring the certain-variable-operation-area switch ends. If there is an input to the probable operation area switch (step A222; Y), a probabilistic operation area passage command is prepared (step A223), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A224). As a result, the effect control device 300 can execute an effect corresponding to the inflow of the game ball into the probable operation area 38h.

  Next, it is determined whether the big hit symbol is a V easy symbol (step A225). The V-easy symbol is a symbol corresponding to 12R probability change, 5R probability change, and 4R probability change. In the case of a big hit due to these symbols, the lower V is released, so that the game ball flows into the positive change operation area 38h almost certainly. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit by 5R normal or 4R normal that is not a V easy design, the lower short is opened, so that a game ball rarely flows into the positive change operation area 38h.

  If the big hit symbol is a V-easy symbol (step A225; Y), the variable probability operation area normal passage information is set (step A226), and the set information is saved in the variable probability operation area passage information area (step A228). ), The probable change operation area switch monitoring processing ends. If the big hit symbol is not the V-easy symbol (step A225; N), the variable probability operation area irregular passage information is set (step A227), and the set information is saved in the variable probability operation area passage information area (step A229). ), The probable change operation area switch monitoring processing ends.

[Remaining ball processing timer update processing]
Next, the details of the remaining ball processing timer update processing (step A6) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. In the updating process of the remaining ball processing timer as shown in FIG. 38, first, the upper ball winning timer remaining ball processing timer for managing the upper ball winning ball remaining ball processing time which is the remaining ball processing time for the second special variable winning device 39. Is determined to be 0 (step A231).

  Then, when the upper prize winning port remaining ball processing timer is 0 (step A231; Y), that is, when the upper prize winning port remaining ball processing time, which is the remaining sphere processing time for the second special variable winning device 39, is not in progress. Shifts to Step A235. Also, if the upper winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing timer is not 0 (step A231; N), that is, if the upper prize winning port remaining sphere processing time is being processed, the upper winning prize opening remaining ball processing timer is updated by -1 ( (Step A232), it is determined whether or not the upper prize winning port remaining ball processing timer has become 0 (step A233).

  If the upper winning a prize port remaining ball processing timer is not 0 (step A233; N), the process proceeds to step A235. When the upper-winning-prize-winning-port remaining-sphere processing timer becomes 0 (step A233; Y), the end of the upper-winning-winning-winning-remaining-sphere processing time is set (step A234). In the setting at the end of the upper prize winning port remaining ball processing time, the special electric auditors 1 operating signal is set to OFF, the upper prize winning port open state flag is cleared, and the upper prize winning port illegal monitoring period flag is saved. I do.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lower special winning port remaining ball processing timer for managing the lower special winning port remaining ball processing time, which is the remaining ball processing time for the first special variable winning device 38, is 0 (step A235). If the lower-large-winning-port remaining-sphere processing timer is not 0 (step A235; N), that is, if the lower-large-winning-port remaining-sphere processing time is being processed, the lower-large-winning-port remaining-sphere processing timer is updated by -1. (Step A236), it is determined whether or not the lower prize winning port remaining ball processing timer has reached 0 (Step A237).

  When the lower winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing timer is not 0 (step A237; N), the remaining ball processing timer updating process ends. If the lower-large-winning-port remaining-sphere processing timer has reached 0 (step A237; Y), the end of the lower-large-winning-port remaining-sphere processing time is set (step A238). In the setting at the end of the lower ball winning port processing time for the remaining ball, the special electric accessory 2 in-operation signal is set to off, the lower wheel winning port open state flag is cleared, and the lower wheel winning port illegal monitoring period flag is saved. I do.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the lever solenoid is stopped (step A239). If the lever solenoid is stopped (step A239; Y), the remaining ball processing timer updating process ends. The state where the lever solenoid is stopped is a state that is set when the first special fluctuation winning device 38 is opened other than in the first round, that is, when the lever solenoid 38f is kept OFF. In this case, since the lever solenoid 38f does not operate after the elapse of the remaining ball processing time, the subsequent processing relating to the operation of the lever solenoid 38f after the elapse of the remaining ball processing time is not performed.

  If the lever solenoid is not stopped (step A239; N), the remaining ball monitoring operation information is saved in the lever solenoid information area (step A240), and it is determined whether the number of remaining balls is 0 (step A242). ). If the number of remaining balls is not 0 (step A242; N), the remaining ball processing timer updating process ends. In this case, the operation of monitoring the remaining sphere of the lever solenoid is maintained.

  If the number of remaining balls is 0 (step A242; Y), the lever solenoid is set at the end of monitoring of the remaining balls (step A243), and the remaining ball processing timer updating process ends. In the setting of the lever solenoid at the end of the monitoring of the remaining sphere, the stopping information is saved in the lever solenoid information area, and the stopping value is saved in the control pointer of the lever solenoid control area. Further, the control timer area of the lever solenoid control area is cleared to zero.

  On the other hand, if the lower winning a prize port remaining ball processing timer is 0 (step A235; Y), that is, if the remaining sphere processing time of the lower prize winning port has already ended, the lever solenoid performs the remaining ball monitoring operation. Is determined (step A241). If the lever solenoid is not performing the remaining ball monitoring operation (step A241; N), the remaining ball processing timer updating process ends. If the lever solenoid is performing the remaining ball monitoring operation (step A241; Y), the process proceeds to step A242. In this case, when the number of remaining balls becomes 0 (Step A242; Y), the setting of the lever solenoid at the time of monitoring the remaining ball is performed (Step A243), and the operation of the lever solenoid 38f ends.

  Through the above processing, the processing time of the remaining ball of the upper winning prize mouth and the processing time of the remaining sphere of the lower winning port are managed. The timer that manages the upper winning prize opening ball processing time and the lower winning prize opening remaining ball processing time is a timer different from the special figure game processing timer in order to manage at least the opening time of the special variable winning device in the special gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to manage the processing time of the upper winning prize hole remaining ball and the processing time of the lower prize winning port remaining ball in parallel with the progress of the special game state. That is, it is possible to manage the opening time of the special variable prize apparatus and the processing time of the large winning opening remaining ball of the other special variable prize apparatus.

  If the special time game processing timer attempts to control the interval time and the subsequent winning port remaining ball processing time by one special figure game processing timer, the special figure game processing timer manages the interval time after managing the openable time in the round. After that, the processing of the winning ball remaining ball processing time is performed and the opening time of the next round is managed, so that the time between rounds becomes longer. If an attempt is made to shorten the time between rounds, the processing time of the winning prize hole remaining ball will also be shortened, so that it is likely that regular winnings will be treated as invalid. Conversely, if the processing time of the special winning port remaining ball is increased in order to prevent such a situation, there is a problem that the time between rounds becomes longer and the digestion speed in the special game state is sacrificed.

  In addition, since the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are alternately opened, a sufficient length of the upper ball winning ball remaining ball processing time and the lower ball winning port remaining ball processing time of a sufficient length are always ensured. It is possible to do. Then, after the end of the special winning opening residual ball processing time, a fraud monitoring period is set until the opening of the special variable winning device that has been processed for the special winning opening residual ball processing time. Even if there is an act of illegally winning a game ball to the special variable prize winning device that is kept closed after the end of the ball processing time, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of damage.

  From the above, the game is controlled in the gaming machine that executes the variable display game based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. A game control means (game control device 100), a first special variable prize device 38 and a second special variable prize which can be converted into a closed state in which game balls cannot be won and an open state in which game balls can be won in a special game state. Device 39, and the game control means opens one of the first special variable prize device 38 and the second special variable prize device 39 in each round in a special game state composed of a plurality of rounds. The first special variable prize device 38 and the second special variable prize device 39 are controlled so as to be alternately opened for each round by changing the special variable prize device opened for each round. Based on the end of the opening in the round, control is performed so as to start the special winning opening residual ball processing time in which the detection of the game ball flowing into the special variable winning device opened in the round is treated as a normal winning, and the special winning opening remaining ball is controlled. The processing time is measured by a timer different from at least a timer (special figure game processing timer) for managing the opening time of the special variable winning device in the special game state.

  Therefore, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are alternately opened, so that it is possible to secure the processing time of the large winning port remaining ball for the closed special variable winning device, and to maintain the large winning port remaining ball. Since the processing time and the opening time of the special variable winning device are managed independently, while the special variable winning device is open, the large winning opening remaining ball processing time of the other special variable winning device can be properly managed and closed. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the special variable prize winning device inside.

  In addition, the game control means (game control device 100) performs the processing from the end of the special winning opening remaining ball processing time until the special variable winning device targeted for the special winning opening remaining ball processing time is opened. This means that the winning in the special variable winning device is invalidated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent illegal acts during the special game state.

(Normal processing of special maps)
Next, details of the special figure ordinary processing (step A12) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 39, in the special figure ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether both the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) and the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) are both “0”. (Step A301). If both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are not “0” (step A301; N), that is, if at least one of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number is not 0, the change order flag is set. A flag is loaded from the storage area (for the total number of reservations of 1) (step A302), and it is determined whether the figure is a change in the special figure 1 (step A303).

  If the figure is the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (step A303; Y), that is, if the information of the special figure 1 is stored in the fluctuation order flag storage area (for the total number of reservations 1), A corresponding decoration special figure reservation number command is prepared (step A304), and effect command setting processing (step A305) is performed. At this point, the special figure 1 reserved number is not subtracted, so a decorative special figure reserved number command corresponding to the current value of the special figure 1 reserved number -1 is prepared. Then, special figure 1 change start processing (step A306) is performed, and the special figure ordinary processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the figure is not the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (step A303; N), that is, if the information of the special figure 2 is stored in the fluctuation order flag storage area (for the total number of reservations 1), it corresponds to the special figure 2 reservation number A decoration special figure reservation number command to be prepared is prepared (step A307), and effect command setting processing (step A308) is performed. At this point, the special figure 2 reservation number command corresponding to the current value of the special figure 2 reservation number -1 is prepared because the special figure 2 reservation number has not been subtracted. Then, special figure 2 change start processing (step A309) is performed, and the special figure ordinary processing ends.

  When both the number of reserved special figure 1 and the number of reserved special figure 2 are “0” (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A310). If it has been started (step A310; Y), the process proceeds to step A314. If the customer waiting demonstration has not been started (step A310; N), a customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step A311). Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A312), and effect command setting processing (step A313) is performed.

  Next, "0" relating to the special figure ordinary processing is set as the processing number (step A314), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A315), and the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A315). Step A316). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper winning prize mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A317), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A318). The drawing usually ends.

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 change start processing (step A306) in the above-described special figure ordinary processing will be described. The special figure 1 change start processing is a processing performed at the start of the special figure 1 change display game. As shown in FIG. 40, first, a special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A321). Next, a number-of-games command corresponding to the value of the number-of-games area for managing the number of executions of the special figure change display game for changing the effect mode is prepared (step A322), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A323).

  After that, a big hit flag 1 setting process (step A324) is performed to set the big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit. Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A325) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed. An information setting process (step A326) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which various information relating to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game are set (step A326). Step A327). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A328) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting processing (step A328) for setting fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (step A328) A329) is performed.

  Next, "1" is set as the processing number (step A330), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A331). Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A332), and a signal relating to the start of the change of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A333). Thereafter, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A334), and the initial value of the blink control timer (timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is stored in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (step A334). Here, 100 ms is set (step A335), an initial value (here, 0) is set in the special figure 1 variable symbol number area (step A336), and the special figure 1 variable start process is ended.

  The initial value set in the special figure 1 variable symbol number area is 0, so that variable display is started from a state where all segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state where the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 change start processing (step A309) in the above-described special figure ordinary processing will be described. The special figure 2 change start processing is a processing performed at the start of the special figure 2 change display game, and is the same processing as the processing in the special figure 1 change start processing shown in FIG. 40 except for the second start storage. Is what you do.

  As shown in FIG. 41, first, a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A341). Next, a game count command corresponding to the value of the game count area for managing the execution count of the special figure change display game for changing the effect mode is prepared (step A342), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A343). After that, a big hit flag 2 setting process (step A343) for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A345) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. An information setting process (step A346) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which various information relating to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are set (step A346). Step A347). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A348) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process (step A348) for setting fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed. A349).

  Next, "1" is set as the processing number (step A350), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A351). Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A352), and a signal relating to the start of the change of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A353). Thereafter, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A354), and the initial value of the blink control timer (the timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is stored in the special figure 2 blink control timer area (step A354). Here, 100 ms) is set (step A355), an initial value (here, 0) is set in the special figure 2 variable symbol number area (step A356), and the special figure 2 variation start processing is ended.

  The initial value to be set in the special figure 2 variable symbol number area is 0, so that the variable display is started from a state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state where the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 42 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A324) in the above-described special figure 1 change start process. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A361). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) of the RWM and prepared (step A362), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) is cleared to 0. (Step A363). The reserved number 1 area is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure 1 start storage which is the earliest of the special figures 1 in the special order. Thereafter, a big hit determination process (step A364) for determining whether or not the big hit is a big hit according to whether or not the prepared big random number value matches the big hit determination value is performed.

  If the result of the jackpot determination process (step A364) is a jackpot (step A365; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the missed information was saved in step A361 (step A366). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot determination process (step A364) is not a jackpot (step A365; N), the jackpot flag 1 setting process ends while saving the information on the jackpot flag 1. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is one of “big hit” and “missing”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 43 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A344) in the above-described special figure 2 change start process. In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) and prepared (step A372), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0. (Step A373). The reserved number 1 area is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) on the starting storage of the special figure 2 in the special figure 2 whose digestion order is the earliest. After that, a big hit determination process (step A374) for determining whether or not the big hit is a big hit according to whether or not the prepared big random number value matches the big hit determination value is performed.

  If the result of the jackpot determination process (step A374) is a jackpot (step A375; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the missed information was saved in step A371 (step A376). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process (step A374) is not a jackpot (step A375; N), the jackpot flag 2 setting process ends while saving the deviation information to the jackpot flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is one of “big hit” and “missing”.

[Big hit determination process]
FIG. 44 shows the big hit determination processing (steps A364 and A374) in the big hit flag 1 setting processing and the big hit flag 2 setting processing described above. In the big hit determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit determination value that is the lower limit value of the jackpot determination value and is equal to or less than the upper limit determination value that is the upper limit value of the jackpot determination value. , Is determined to be a big hit.

  If the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A382; Y), a loss is set as the judgment result (step A387), and the big hit judgment processing ends. If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (Step A382; N), it is determined whether the state is the high probability state (Step A383). If the state is the high probability state (step A383; Y), the upper limit judgment value during the high probability is set (step A384), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A386). ). If the state is not the high-probability state (step A383; N), an upper-limit determination value during low-probability is set (step A385), and it is determined whether the value of the target big-hit random number is larger than the upper-limit determination value (step A386). .

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; Y), a loss is set as the judgment result (step A357), and the big hit judgment processing ends. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step A388), and the big hit judgment processing ends.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing]
FIG. 45 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing (step A325) in the above-described special figure 1 change start processing. In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401). ) Is loaded with a jackpot symbol random number (step A402). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). By this processing, the type of the special result is selected.

  Thereafter, a special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A405), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 1 display 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, round number upper limit information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A407). One of 12R, 5R and 4R is set as the round number upper limit information area. Then, the special winning opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the special winning opening information area (step A408), and the process proceeds to step A411. The special winning opening information is information that defines an opening pattern (see FIG. 7) in the special gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), the stop symbol number at the time of the loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A409), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. Then (step A410), the process proceeds to step A411. By the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set.

  Thereafter, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A411), the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A412), and the effect command setting processing (step A413) is performed. The decoration special figure command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A414), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A415), and the special figure 1 The stop symbol setting process ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
FIG. 46 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (step A345) in the above-described special figure 2 change start processing. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431). ) Is loaded with a jackpot symbol random number (step A432). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step A433), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stopped symbol number area (step A434). By this processing, the type of the special result is selected.

  Thereafter, a special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A435), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, round number upper limit information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is obtained and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A437). One of 12R, 5R and 4R is set as the round number upper limit information area. Then, the special winning opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the special winning opening information area (step A438), and the process proceeds to step A441. The special winning opening information is information that defines an opening pattern (see FIG. 7) in the special gaming state.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of the loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A439), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. Then (step A440), the process proceeds to step A441. By the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set.

  After that, an ornament special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A441). The decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step A442), and effect command setting processing (step A443) is performed. The decoration special figure command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (Step A444), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (Step A445). The two-stop symbol setting process ends.

  That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36), and the second start winning opening (normal variable winning). A variable display game executing means for executing the second variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball by the device 37). In addition, the game control device 100 forms a variable display game execution control unit that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

  Here, the effect in the case of the high probability state will be described. As shown in FIG. 47, in the special figure variation display game which is the 30th, 60th, and 90th times from the end of the special game state, a regular effect is performed. Here, SP reach is generated as a regular performance. In addition, in the special figure variation display game which is the 31st to 40th, the 61st to 70th, and the 91st to 100th times from the end of the special game state, the condition achievement effect is performed. This condition attainment effect is an effect that will be a big hit if SP reach occurs. The SP reach includes SP1 reach, SP2 reach, and SP3 reach. In the regular effect, any one of them is executed, and in the condition attainment effect, if any of these is executed, the condition is achieved.

  Here, after the regular performance of executing the SP reach, a condition achievement performance is performed in which the occurrence of the SP reach, which is the same type of performance as the regular performance, is a big hit condition. As a result, the condition achievement effect is started after the content of the condition is shown to the player, and the effect is easy to understand for the player. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in expectation due to a loss of SP reach performed as a regular effect. Also, by setting the condition of the condition achievement effect to SP reach, the gaming machine can know whether or not the condition is achieved before the start of the special figure change display game by the pre-reading processing (special figure reservation information determination processing), In the look-ahead effect that is an effect based on the result of the look-ahead processing, more various effects can be achieved. Of course, other conditions that can be grasped by the pre-reading process may be used as the conditions. In this case, similarly, various effects can be achieved.

  In addition, the condition attainment effect is started after the execution of the regular effect, and the number of games that execute the condition attainment effect is set to be smaller than the number of games until the next regular effect is executed. But do not overlap. As a result, during the execution of the condition achievement effect conditioned on the occurrence of the SP reach, the regular effect of generating the SP reach is performed, thereby preventing the condition from being achieved unintentionally. It prevents inconsistencies.

  FIG. 48 shows an example of the effect in the high probability state. As shown in FIG. 48 (a), at the center of the display area of the display device 41, a decoration special figure variation display game display section 85 for displaying a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is provided. Here, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed by variably displaying the identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas and then stopping the display.

  In addition, a storage display unit 83 that displays a decorative start storage display corresponding to the first start storage and the second start storage is provided below the display area. The decorative start memory display displayed here corresponds to the first start memory or the second start memory on a one-to-one basis and is displayed side by side in the order of storage. In this case, there are four start memories. I have. The first start memory and the second start memory may be displayed so as to be distinguishable. The decoration start memory display at the left end is the decoration start storage display corresponding to the earliest stored start memory, and shifts to the left every time it is consumed. In addition, it is possible to indicate the result of the pre-reading of the result of the special figure change display game, the change pattern, etc. corresponding to each start memory, the effect of the regular effect and the condition attainment effect by the display mode.

  At the lower part of the display area and to the left of the storage display unit 83, there is provided an execution storage display unit 84 that displays information related to the start storage corresponding to the currently running special figure change display game. At the start of the special figure change display game, the decoration start storage display at the left end of the storage display section 83 is shifted to the in-execution storage display section 84, and the result and the change pattern of the special figure change display game to be executed are displayed. This is indicated by the display mode.

  FIG. 48A shows a state in which the special figure change display game, which is the 29th time from the end of the special game state and is in the high probability state, has ended. In the special figure variation display game in which the regular effect and the condition achievement effect are not performed in the high probability state, an effect indicating that the state is the high probability state is performed. Then, in the 30th special figure fluctuation display game in which the regular effect is executed, the fluctuation display is performed as shown in FIG. 48B, and the reach state is reached as shown in FIG. ), SP reach is achieved. Here, the result is a miss, and as shown in FIG. 48 (e), the result of the miss is displayed, and the special figure change display game ends. In the case of a regular production, it may be notified that the production is a regular production.

  From the next game, a condition achievement effect is started. As shown in FIG. 48 (f), at the start of the 31st special figure change display game from the end of the special game state, a notification that the condition achievement effect is started is issued. In this notification, the set condition is also reported. In addition, the remaining number of games for performing the condition achievement effect is also displayed. Then, when the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit is performed during the condition achievement effect, the condition is achieved, and the reach state is generated as shown in FIG. ), SP reach occurs. At this time, notification that the condition has been achieved is also performed. Thereafter, the result of the big hit is displayed as shown in FIG. 48 (i), and the special figure change display game ends.

[Special figure information setting processing]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting processing (steps A170, A326, and A346) in the special figure suspension information determination processing, the special figure 1 change start processing, and the special figure 2 change start processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 49, in the special figure information setting process, first, a variable group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and a variable group selection pointer corresponding to a probability state and a stopped symbol pattern number is obtained (step A452). . Note that the probability state is one of three states: a low probability state and a time reduction state, a high probability state and a time reduction state, a low probability state and a time reduction state. Further, the stop symbol pattern number is any one of 0 to 5 corresponding to each of the missing symbol, the 12R variable symbol, the 5R variable symbol, the 5R normal symbol, the 4R variable symbol, and the 4R normal symbol.

  Next, it is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is a lost symbol (step A453). If the symbol is not a lost symbol (step A453; N), that is, if it is a big hit symbol, the pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area ( Step A459), and terminates the special figure information setting processing. If it is a lost symbol (step A453; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of high-probability fluctuations that manages the number of special-figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the high-probability state is a value of a regular effect (step A454). ).

  As described above, the regular effect is executed in the special figure change display game in which the number of executions of the special figure change display game from the end of the special game state becomes a predetermined number when the high probability state is reached after the end of the special game state. It is a directing. Here, SP reach is generated as a regular effect in the special figure variation display game which is the 30th, 60th, and 90th times from the end of the special game state. That is, the case where the number of times of high probability change is 71, 41 and 11 is the case of the value of the regular effect. If the high-probability change count is the value of the regular effect (step A454; Y), the variable group selection pointer is updated to the value for the regular effect (step A457), and the pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area (step A457). A459), the special figure information setting processing ends. If the number of high-probability changes is not the value of the regular effect (step A454; N), it is determined whether the number of high-probability changes is the value of the condition-achieving effect (step A455).

  As described above, the condition attainment effect is a special figure variation display game in which the number of executions of the special figure variation display game from the end of the special game state is within a predetermined number of times when the high probability state is reached after the special game state ends Is an effect that is executed when the SP reach occurs. Here, the condition achievement effect is performed in the special figure change display game which is the 31st to 40th, the 61st to 70th, and the 91st to 100th times from the end of the special game state. That is, the case where the number of times of high probability change is 70 to 61, 40 to 31, and 10 to 1 is the value of the condition achievement effect.

  When the number of times of high probability change is the value of the condition achievement effect (step A455; Y), the change group selection pointer is updated to the value for the condition achievement effect (step A458), and the pointer is saved in the change group selection pointer area. (Step A459), and terminates the special figure information setting processing. If the number of times of high probability fluctuation is not the value of the condition achievement effect (step A455; N), the fluctuation group selection pointer is updated to a value corresponding to the total value of the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations (step A455). A456), the pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area (step A459), and the special figure information setting processing ends. In other words, when the result is a big hit, the variation pattern can be selected without considering the number of stored memories, and when the result is unsatisfactory, the variation pattern can be selected considering the number of stored memories. In step A456, the variable group selection pointer is updated in consideration of whether the processing target is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 or the current effect mode.

  For example, when the processing mode is the special mode 1 when the effect mode is the normal mode, if the total number of holdings is any of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 to 8, the variable group is considered. Update the selection pointer. When the effect mode is the normal mode and the processing target is the special figure 2, the variable group selection pointer is updated without considering the total number of reservations. Then, when the effect mode is other than the normal mode and the processing target is the special figure 1, the variable group selection pointer is updated without considering the total number of reservations, and when the effect mode is other than the normal mode. When the processing target is the special map 2, the variable group selection pointer is updated in consideration of whether the total number of reservations is 0, 1, 2, or 8. It should be noted that the total number of reservations is 0 when there is no start memory (during a customer waiting demonstration) when start memory is generated and the special figure change display game is started, and the total number of reservations is 1 Is a case where the special figure change display game is started in a state where there is one start memory.

[Variation pattern setting processing]
Next, details of the above-described special figure hold information determination processing, special figure 1 change start processing, and change pattern setting processing (steps A171, A328, and A348) in the special figure 2 change start will be described. As shown in FIG. 50, in the variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group selection address table is set (step A461), and the address of the variation group table corresponding to the variation group selection pointer is obtained and prepared (step A462). Then, the variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepared (step A463).

  Then, a 2-byte allocation process (step A464) is performed to obtain and prepare the address of the variation pattern selection table obtained as a result of the allocation (step A465), and the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (the number of reservations) 1), and prepares by loading the variation pattern random number 2 (step A466). Then, a distribution process (step A467) is performed to obtain a variation pattern number obtained as a result of the distribution, save the variation pattern number area, and end the variation pattern setting process. By this processing, the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game such as the presence or absence of reach and the type of reach is set. That is, the game control device 100 forms a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from a plurality of variations.

[2-byte distribution processing]
FIG. 51 shows a 2-byte distribution process (step A464) in the above-described variation pattern setting process. The two-byte distribution process is a process for selecting a variation pattern selection table of the special figure variation display game from the variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In the two-byte distribution processing, first, it is checked whether the first data of the selection table (the variable group table prepared in step A462) is a code without distribution (that is, “0”) (step A471). Here, the variation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one variation pattern selection table, but a variation group table defining only the variation pattern selection table in which the variation pattern is “no reach”. In the case of (for example, a part of the fluctuation group table when the result is out of order), there is no need to assign, so the assignment value “0”, that is, the code without assignment is specified at the top.

  If the first data of the selection table (variable group table) is a code without distribution (step A472; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A477), and the 2-byte distribution is performed. The process ends. On the other hand, if the data at the head of the selection table (fluctuation group table) is not a code without distribution (step A472; N), one distribution value specified first in the selection table (fluctuation group table) is obtained ( Step A473).

  Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value obtained in step A473 from the random number value (the value of the variation pattern random number 1) prepared in step A463 (step A474), and the calculated new random number is calculated. It is determined whether the numerical value is smaller than “0” (step A475). If the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (step A475; N), the address is updated to the address of the next distribution value (step A476), and the process proceeds to step A473. Perform processing. That is, a distribution value specified next in the selection table (fluctuation group table) is obtained (step A473), and then the distribution value is subtracted from the random value determined in the previous step A475, thereby generating a new random value. A numerical value is calculated (step A474), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A475).

  The above process is executed until it is determined in step A475 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A475; Y). As a result, any one of the variation pattern selection tables is selected from the at least one variation pattern selection table specified in the selection table (variation group table). If it is determined in step A475 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A475; Y), the address is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the allocation result (step A477), and the 2-byte allocation processing is performed. To end.

  Note that the distribution process in step A467 in the above-described variation pattern setting process is the same as the above-described 2-byte distribution process. However, the program instruction for calculating differs depending on whether the size of the random number used for distribution is 1 byte or 2 bytes.

  FIG. 52 shows a variable group table that can be selected in the high probability state. FIG. 52A is a fluctuation group table in a case where the result is out of order and the regular effect and the condition achievement effect are not executed. This fluctuating group table is a fluctuating group table that can be selected by the fluctuating group selection pointer acquired in step A456 in the special figure information setting process.

  There are no reach group, SP1 reach system, SP2 reach system, and SP3 reach system as the change groups (change pattern selection table) that can be selected by the change group table, and the distribution values are set respectively. The change group is selected based on the selected change group table and the change pattern random number 1. The variation pattern random number 1 has a value of 0 to 65535. For example, 64906 values are assigned to a system without reach. That is, the fluctuation group of the system without reach is selected with a probability of 64906/65536.

  FIG. 52B is a fluctuation group table in a case where the result is out of order and the condition achievement effect is executed. This fluctuating group table is a fluctuating group table that can be selected by the fluctuating group selection pointer acquired in step A458 in the special figure information setting process. The change group (change pattern selection table) that can be selected by the change group table includes a non-reach type and a normal short-reach type (the fluctuation time is shorter than N reach), and a distribution value is set for each. In other words, if the result is out of order during the condition attainment effect, either no reach or normal short reach occurs, and no SP reach to achieve the condition occurs.

  FIG. 52C is a fluctuation group table in a case where the result is out of order and a regular effect is executed. This fluctuating group table is a fluctuating group table that can be selected by the fluctuating group selection pointer acquired in step A457 in the special figure information setting process. There are SP1 reach system, SP2 reach system, and SP3 reach system as a change group (change pattern selection table) that can be selected by the change group table, and a distribution value is set for each. That is, if the result is out of order during the regular performance, SP reach occurs.

  FIG. 52D is a fluctuation group table when the result is a big hit. When the result is a big hit in the high probability state, the variable group table is selected regardless of whether the regular effect or the condition achievement effect is executed. This fluctuating group table is a fluctuating group table that can be selected by the fluctuating group selection pointer acquired in step A452 in the special figure information setting process. There are SP1 reach system, SP2 reach system, and SP3 reach system as a change group (change pattern selection table) that can be selected by the change group table, and a distribution value is set for each. That is, when a big hit occurs in the high probability state, the SP reach is always generated. Therefore, if the special figure change display game that is a big hit is a special figure change display game that executes a regular effect, SP reach, which is a regular effect, is executed. If the special figure change display game that is a big hit is a special figure change display game that executes a condition attainment effect, SP reach to achieve the condition is executed.

  By setting the variable group table in this manner, SP reach occurs in the regular effect regardless of the result. In the condition attainment effect, SP reach is generated only when the result is a big hit. The effect control device 300 also manages the number of executions of the special figure change display game in the high probability state, and executes the effect by grasping the execution of the regular effect and the condition achievement effect. Of course, the effect control device 100 determines that the game control device 100 is a regular effect, a condition attainment effect, the number of times the game has been executed since the end of the special game state, etc. 300 may be notified, and in this case, the effect control device 300 does not need to manage the number of executions of the special figure change display game.

  That is, the game control device 100 (which may include the effect control device 300) sets an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode in the variable display game, and sets a condition relating to the variable display game, and determines whether the condition is achieved in a predetermined period. A condition attainment effect control means for performing an effect of whether or not, and a regular effect control means for executing a regular effect in the variable display game each time a predetermined execution timing is reached.

  Note that the type of the condition of the regular effect and the condition achievement effect is the same, which means that the condition may be any type of SP reach, and that any of SP1 to SP3 reach may be used. Also, here, the condition of the regular effect and the condition achievement effect is SP reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the SP1 reach of the SP reach may be used, or another variation pattern may be used. Further, an effect other than the fluctuation pattern (such as the appearance of a specific character) may be used as a condition for the regular effect or the condition achieving effect. Further, the period of the condition achievement effect may be a look-ahead zone in which the frequency and accuracy of notifying the look-ahead result are higher than other periods.

  In addition, the period of the condition achievement effect is set to a predetermined number of times the special figure change display game is executed, but may be set to a predetermined time. In this case, it is preferable that the time is shorter than the time from the end of the special figure variation display game in which the regular effect is executed to the time when the next regular effect is executed. For example, in the fluctuation group table shown in FIG. 52B, when the fluctuation group table of the non-reach type is selected, the shortest fluctuation time in the selectable fluctuation pattern is set to 19200 ms, and the fluctuation time in the condition achievement effect is set. The shortest fluctuation time is set. If the result is out of order, 800 ms is set as the stop time for displaying the result, and the shortest execution time of the variable display game in the condition achievement effect is 20,000 ms. Then, a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) equal to or less than the number of variable display games (29 times in this case) that can be executed from the end of the special figure variable display game in which the regular effect is executed until the next execution timing arrives The time value (for example, 20 seconds) multiplied by is set as the condition achievement effect period. In this way, the period of the condition achievement effect and the period of the regular effect can be prevented from overlapping. Further, in this case, for example, if the execution time of the special figure variable display game that is out of the above is set to only a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), if the result does not become a big hit, the predetermined number of special figure change The variable display game can be executed. Further, the remaining time until the end may be displayed.

  Further, the end condition of the condition achievement effect may be separately determined. For example, the condition achievement effect may be ended in the special figure variation display game in a case where N reach has occurred, or an effect as if the vehicle is in the reach state, and the actual reach state has not been achieved. . Further, when a specific extension condition is achieved, the period of the condition achievement effect may be extended. In this case, an effect may be performed such that the display is added to the display of the number of remaining games and the remaining time. Specific extension conditions include, for example, winning a lottery or selecting a particular variation pattern.

Also, when it is clear that the result is a big hit by the pre-reading process or the determination at the start of the special figure change display game, the notification of the number of remaining games and the remaining time is changed to suggest or notify to that effect. You may do it. For example, the display of the number of remaining games and the remaining time is set to “777”. Further, the condition achievement effect may be started when a specific start condition is satisfied. For example, the condition achievement effect may be started when it is clear from the pre-reading process that there is a start memory that results in a big hit. In addition, if the SP reach is generated when the result is out of order except during the execution of the regular effect or the condition attainment effect, even if the condition attainment effect is started from the next game in which the out of SP reach is performed. good.

  As described above, in a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when the result of the variable display game is a special result, Effect mode setting means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) for setting an effect mode, and condition achievement effect control for setting conditions relating to the variable display game and effecting whether or not to achieve the conditions in a predetermined period. Means (game control device 100, effect control device 300), wherein the effect mode setting means executes a periodical effect in the variable display game every time a predetermined execution timing is reached. 100, an effect control device 300), and the condition attainment effect control means is set on condition that an effect of the same type as the regular effect is executed. The it has to be. Therefore, since the condition in the condition achievement effect is executed as a regular effect, the content of the condition can be accurately grasped by the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the condition achievement effect control means sets the predetermined period so that the timing at which the regular effect is executed by the periodic effect control means is not included in the predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a regular effect in which an effect of the same type as the condition achieving effect is executed during the execution of the condition achieving effect.

  In addition, the predetermined execution timing of the regular effect is that the number of times of execution of the variable display game from the end of the special game state reaches a predetermined number, and the regular effect is a specific reach effect. The predetermined period in which the achieved effect is executed is a predetermined time from the end of the variable display game in which the regular effect is executed, and the predetermined time is the next execution timing from the end of the variable display game in which the regular effect is executed. The predetermined time equal to or less than the number of variable display games that can be executed up to the predetermined time obtained by multiplying the minimum execution time in the variable display game in the condition achievement effect by the predetermined number of times, the condition achievement effect control means The effect mode setting means sets a specific reach effect when the result of the variable display game is a special result during a predetermined period in which the condition attainment effect is executed. And thus is a function. Therefore, since the condition in the condition achievement effect is executed as a regular effect, the content of the condition can be accurately grasped by the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent a regular performance in which the same type of performance as the condition achieving performance is performed from being performed during the execution of the condition achieving performance.

  Further, the predetermined period in which the condition achievement effect is executed is a period from a variable display game started next to the variable display game in which the periodic effect is executed to a predetermined number of variable display games, and the predetermined number of times is the predetermined number. This is a number smaller than the number of times until the next execution timing arrives.

[Change start information setting process]
Next, the details of the change start information setting processing (steps A329 and A349) in the above-described special figure 1 change start processing and special figure 2 change start processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 53, in the change start information setting process, first, the random number storage areas of the target change pattern random numbers 1 and 2 are cleared (step A491). Next, a fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and a fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A493). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared (step A494), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A495).

  Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is updated by -1 (step A496), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is set (step A497). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A498), and the empty area after the shift is cleared (step A499). Then, the variable order flag storage area is shifted (step A500), and the empty area after the shift is cleared (step A501).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the player is in an auto-input mode in which the player does not operate the operation means (the effect button 25, the touch panel 29) and operates in the same state as the operation (step A502). If not (step A502; N), the change start information setting process ends. If the automatic input mode is being performed (step A502; Y), an initial value (here, 500 ms) is saved in the PB command control timer area (step A503), and the PB command number area is cleared to 0 (step A504). ), The change start information setting process ends. Thus, in the case of the automatic input mode, the PB ON command is transmitted when a predetermined time (here, 500 ms) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation.

  Through the above processing, information regarding the start of the special figure change display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 forms a determination unit that determines various random numbers stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Then, the information on the start of the special figure change display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined change pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special figure change display game. Set the details of the effect in the decoration special figure change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information on the number of storages to be started (reserved number), a decoration special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information on the pattern is given, and the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the change command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A13) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, in the special figure changing process, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is prepared as information for stopping the variable display (step A601), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A601). A602). Next, a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, if the stop symbol pattern is a lost symbol pattern, 800 ms is set as the display time, and if the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern, 2000 ms is set as the display time. That is, the game control device 100 forms a stop time setting unit that sets a stop time for displaying a stop result mode of the variable display game.

  Thereafter, the process number “2” related to the special figure displaying process is set (step A605), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A606). Next, a signal related to the end of the change of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 changing signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and a signal related to the end of the change of the special figure 2 (eg, the special symbol) 2 The signal during the change is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A608), and the control timer is initialized in the symbol determination number signal control timer area relating to the number of executions of the special figure variable display game for output to the external information terminal. The value (for example, 256 ms) is saved (step A609).

  Thereafter, as a control information for the special figure 1 change display game on the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag related to the change stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 change control flag area (step A610). ), As a control information for the special figure 2 change display game on the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag relating to the change stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 change control flag area (step A611), the special figure displaying process ends.

[Processing during special map display]
Next, the details of the special figure display processing (step A14) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, in the special figure displaying process, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 change start process, and the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 change start process. Is loaded (step A701), and the big hit flag 1 area and big hit flag 2 area of the RWM are cleared (step A702). Then, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A703), and if it is determined that the big hit is a big hit (step A703; Y), the start of the big hit (the special figure 2 big hit) of the special figure 2 variable display game is started. The test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal ON, the special symbol 2 hit signal ON) is saved in the RWM test signal output data area (step A706), and the round is performed. A number upper limit value table is set (step A707).

  On the other hand, as a result of checking the big hit flag 2 in step A703, if it is determined that the big hit is not a big hit (step A703; N), it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A704), and the big hit is determined (step A704). If it is determined to be A704; Y), a test signal (for example, a signal during the operation of the condition device is turned ON, a signal during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is turned ON, and a special signal is turned ON) The signal per symbol (ON) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A705), and a process of setting a round number upper limit value table (step A707) is performed.

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (Step A707), the round number upper limit value (in the case of the present embodiment, any of 12, 5, or 4) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained, It is saved in the RWM round number upper limit area (step A708). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is obtained and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A709).

  Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A710), and effect command setting processing (step A711) is performed. After that, a probability information command relating to information for setting the probability of a winning result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A712), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A713) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process (step A714). A715).

  Next, the special winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a winning result in the ordinary figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A716). Thereafter, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A717). As a result, information on the probability state and the time saving state of the special map when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the big hit fanfare time (100 ms in this case) corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A718), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A719) is performed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the player is in an auto-input mode in which a state equivalent to the operation performed by the player without operating the operation means (the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29) is obtained (step A720). If not (step A720; N), the special figure displaying process ends. When the automatic input mode is being performed (step A720; Y), 1 is saved in the PB command number area (step A721), and a PB command (here, a PB off command) for the PB command number is prepared (step A722). ). Then, effect command setting processing is performed (step A723), and the special figure fluctuation processing ends. As a result, in the case of the automatic input mode, the PB off command is transmitted at the end of the fluctuation. That is, the game control device 100 determines whether the result is a special result in either the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, and the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39. In a special game state generating means for generating a special game state in which is converted to an open state.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit in step A704 (step A704; N), a time shortening change frequency updating process (step A724) for managing the period of the high probability state or the time saving state is performed, and the effect mode is set. A special game information check process (step A725) is performed. Next, "0" relating to the special figure ordinary processing is set as the processing number (step A726), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A727), and the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A727). Step A728). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the player is in the automatic input mode in which the state is the same as the state in which the player has performed the operation without operating the operation means (step A729), and if the player is not in the automatic input mode (step A729; N). Ends the special figure displaying process. If the automatic input mode is being performed (step A729; Y), 1 is saved in the PB command number area (step A730), and a PB command (here, a PB off command) for the PB command number is prepared (step A731). ). Then, effect command setting processing is performed (step A732), and the special figure fluctuation processing ends. As a result, in the case of the automatic input mode, the PB off command is transmitted at the end of the fluctuation.

[Time reduction fluctuation count update processing]
Next, the details of the time reduction fluctuation count update processing (step A724) in the above-described special figure display processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 56, in the time reduction change frequency update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure time reduction is in progress (during the time reduction state) (step A751). If it is not during the special figure time reduction (step A751; N), the time reduction variation number update processing ends. If the special figure time is being reduced (step A751; Y), it is determined whether the special figure is in the high probability state (in the high probability state) (step A752). If it is not during the special figure high probability (step A752; N), the process proceeds to step A757. If the special figure high probability is in progress (step A752; Y), the number of times of high probability change is updated by -1 (step A753), and it is determined whether the number of times of high probability change is “0” (step A754). ).

  If the number of high-probability changes is not “0” (step A754; N), the process proceeds to step A757. When the number of times of high probability change becomes “0” (step A754; Y), that is, when the high probability state ends in the current special figure change display game, the high probability notification flag area is cleared (step A754). A755), clears the certainty variable operation area passage information area (step A756), and proceeds to step A757. Note that the information in the certain-variable-operation-area passing information area is cleared by this processing or by turning on the power of the gaming machine.

  Next, the number of times of time shortening change is updated by -1 (step A757), and it is determined whether the number of times of time shortening change becomes "0" (step A758). If the number of times of the time shortening change is not “0” (step A758; N), the time shortening change number updating process is ended. In addition, when the number of times of the time shortening change becomes “0” (step A758; Y), that is, when the time saving state ends in the current special figure change display game, a signal relating to the time saving end (for example, turning off the two big hit signals is turned off). ) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A759).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, both the high probability state and the time saving state are terminated by executing the same number of special figure change display games, so if the high probability change number becomes 0, , The number of times of the time shortening change becomes zero, and the high probability state and the time saving state end at the same time. In step A760, for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol is turned off. 1 Set the high probability state signal to OFF. In addition, even when the special figure is in the high probability state, only the probability state changes in the ordinary figure, so the ordinary symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the ordinary electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always OFF.

  Next, the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A761), the ordinary figure low probability flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A762), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. The low probability & no time saving flag is saved (step A763). Further, a signal (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) related to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A764), and the display LED for right-handing (for example, the second game state display unit 77) is set. In order to turn off the light, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A765), and the time reduction fluctuation number updating process ends.

[Special figure game information check processing]
Next, details of the special figure game information check processing (step A725) in the above described special figure displaying processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 57, in the special figure game information check processing, first, it is determined whether the next mode transition information is a code without update (step A771). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771; Y), the special figure game information check processing ends. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure change display games.

  If the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (step A771; N), the number of games, which is the number of times the special figure variable display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step A772). It is determined whether the number of times has become “0” (step A773). If the number of games has not become “0” (step A773; N), the special figure game information check processing ends. If the number of games has become “0” (step A773; Y), that is, if the effect mode is to be changed from the next special figure variation display game, an effect mode information address table is set (step A774). The address of the table corresponding to the mode transition information is obtained (step A775).

  Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the number of games in the effect mode to be shifted is acquired, and saved in the number of games area in the RWM. Then, the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transitioned is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A779). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (step A780), and the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A781), and the effect command setting process (step A781). Step A782) is performed.

  Next, a game count command corresponding to the newly set game count is prepared (step A783), an effect command setting process (step A784) is performed, and the special figure game information check process ends. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of giving an advance notice of the switching from the specified number of revolutions before the effect mode is switched. By managing the effect modes in the game control device 100 in this way, for example, control such as generating a specific reach only in a specific effect mode can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A719) in the above-described special figure display processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 58, in the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1, first, a processing number relating to the fanfare / interval processing is set to “3” (step A791), and the processing is performed in the special figure game processing number area. The number is saved (step A792).

  Next, signals relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 The fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned off and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A793). In addition, even when the special figure is in the high probability state, only the probability state changes in the ordinary figure, so the ordinary symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the ordinary electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always OFF. Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A794), the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A795), and the ordinary figure game mode flag is set. The low probability flag is saved in the area (step A796).

  Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A797), and a high-probability notification flag is set to turn off the game state display LED (third game state display unit 78) provided on the game board 30 for displaying the high probability state. The area is cleared (step A798), and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A799).

  Next, the number of high probability variation display games that can be executed in the high probability state is cleared to 0 (step A800), and the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the time reduction state is managed. The time reduction fluctuation count area is cleared to 0 (step A801). Then, the normal mode number is saved in the effect mode number area (step A802), the number-of-games area is cleared to 0 (step A803), and the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A804). Thereafter, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in a power failure restoration transmission command area for saving a command output to the effect control device 300 when the power failure is restored (step A805). As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state are terminated, and the normal state and the normal state are established. Further, the information of the effect mode is temporarily cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

  Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and the display LED for right-handed (eg, the second game state display unit 77) is set. To turn on the light, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A807), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 ends.

[Fanfare / interval processing]
Next, details of the fanfare / interval processing (step A15) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 59, in the processing during the fanfare / interval, first, it is determined whether an odd round which is a round for opening the first special variable winning device 38 is started (step A841). (Step A841; N), that is, if the round is an even-numbered round in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, the flow shifts to step A843. If the odd round has started (step A841; Y), it is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter for managing the number of game balls remaining in the upper channel 38j of the first special variable winning device 38 is zero (0). Step A842).

  If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step A842; N), the processing during the fanfare / interval ends. That is, if the first special fluctuation winning device 38 is opened when the game ball remains in the upper flow path 38j, the remaining ball may flow into the positive change operation area 38h. In particular, immediately after the opening of the first special variable winning device 38, the game ball is likely to flow into the probable variable operation area 38h, so that the possibility of the high probability state is very high. For this reason, when there is a remaining ball in the upper flow path 38j, that is, when there is a game ball that may flow into the certain variable operation area 38h forming a specific area in the first special variable winning device 38, the certain variable The start of the round for opening the first special variable winning device 38 is waited until it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may flow into the operation area 38h. In the case of an even-numbered round in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, the round is started regardless of the presence or absence of a game ball in the second special variable winning device 39.

  If the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A842; Y), the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step A843), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state is prepared (step A842). A844), effect command setting processing (step A845) is performed. Thereafter, a special winning opening opening table is set (step A846), and special winning opening opening data corresponding to the special winning opening information and the number of rounds is acquired and saved (step A847). The special winning opening data is data indicating which one of the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 is to be opened, and an opening mode such as an opening time.

  Then, it is determined whether the round is a long open round from the special winning opening data and the current round number in the special game state being executed (step A848). The long open round is a round in which the upper long open or the lower long open. The upper short opening and the lower short opening are short opening rounds. Further, the latter half of the opening in the lower V release is also treated as a long opening, but in this determination, the lower V opening is treated as a short opening round.

  If the round is not a long open round (step A848; N), the flow shifts to step A851. If the round is a long release round (step A848; Y), a long release command is prepared (step A849), an effect command setting process is performed (step A850), and the flow shifts to step A851. The long opening command is a command for informing the effect control device 300 of the start of a round in which long opening is to be performed, and the effect control device 300 starts an effect of long opening based on this command.

  Then, it is determined whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit area (step A851). (Step A851; Y), the process proceeds to Step A856. If it is not the last round (step A851; N), it is determined whether or not it is the lever solenoid operation round (step A852). The lever solenoid operation round is a round in which the lever solenoid 38f is operated to operate the lever member 38i, and in the case of the present embodiment, only the first specific round.

  If it is the lever solenoid operation round (step A852; Y), the operation data of the lever solenoid is set (step A853), and the process proceeds to step A856. As a result, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area, and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared.

  If it is not a lever solenoid operation round (step A852; N), it is determined whether or not an odd round is started (step A854). If it is not an odd round (step A854; N), the process proceeds to step A856. . In this case, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. If it is the start of an odd round (step A854; Y), stop data of the lever solenoid is set (step A855), and the flow shifts to step A856. In this case, the first special fluctuation winning device 38 is opened but the lever solenoid 38f is not operated.

  After that, the special winning opening time corresponding to the special winning opening data is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A856), and the hit start pointer value corresponding to the special winning opening data is acquired to obtain the special drawing winning time. The data is saved in the control pointer area (step A857). Further, a hit end pointer value corresponding to the special winning opening release data is acquired and saved in the special map end pointer area (step A858), and it is determined whether or not an odd round has started (step A859).

  If the odd round is not to be started (step A859; N), a special winning opening opening process shift setting process 1 is performed (step A860), and the fanfare / interval process ends. If the odd round is to be started (step A859; Y), a special winning opening opening process shift setting process 2 is performed (step A861), and the fanfare / interval process ends.

  In step A842, it is checked whether the remaining ball counter is 0. In addition, it is checked whether the discharge ball counter is 0, and if not, the processing after step A843 is not performed. You may do it. That is, the round may be started after it is confirmed that all the game balls in the first special variable winning device 38 have been discharged.

  As described above, the game is controlled in the gaming machine that executes the variable display game based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. A game control means (game control device 100) and a special area (where a game ball can be converted into a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won and an open state in which a game ball can be won in a special game state, into which a game ball can flow). A first special variable prize winning device 38 having a certain variation operating region 38h), and a first special variable prize winning device 38 capable of converting into a closed state in which game balls cannot be won and an open state in which game balls can be won in a special game state, and having no specific region. 2 special fluctuation winning device 39, the game control means is based on the fact that the game ball that has won the first special fluctuation winning device 38 flows into the specific area, the game ball does not flow into the specific area A game state advantageous to the player can be generated after the end of the special game state, and in the special game state composed of a plurality of rounds, in each round, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are provided. Is controlled so that the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are alternately opened for each round by changing one of the special variable winning devices opened for each round. Then, when starting the round in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may flow into the specific area in the first special variable winning device 38. This means that the game waits for the start of the round.

  Therefore, the start of the round for opening the first special variable winning device 38 is waited until it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may flow into the specific area, so that the fairness of the game can be ensured. .

  When starting a round to open the second special variable prize device 39, the game control means (game control device 100) determines whether all game balls flowing into the second special variable prize device 39 have been discharged. Regardless of whether or not the round is started. Therefore, when the second special variable prize device 39 having no specific area is opened, it is opened without confirmation of discharge, so that the special game state can be quickly consumed.

  In step A841, it may be determined whether or not a specific round has started, and it may be determined whether or not the remaining ball counter is 0 only when the specific round has started. That is, a game control means for controlling a game in a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a result of the variable display game is a special result. (Game control device 100) and a specific area (probable operation area) in which a special game state can be converted into a closed state in which game balls cannot be won and an open state in which game balls can be won, and into which game balls can flow. 38h), and a second special fluctuation which can be converted into a closed state in which game balls cannot be won and an open state in which game balls can be won in a special game state, and has no specific area. And a prize device 39, wherein the game control means is configured to determine whether the game ball that has won the first special variable prize device 38 flows into the specific region, Can be generated after the end of the special game state, and in the special game state composed of a plurality of rounds, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are used in each round. By controlling either of the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 to be opened alternately for each round by opening one of them and changing the special variable winning device opened for each round, In the special game state, control is performed such that a round for opening the first special variable winning device 38 is executed a plurality of times, and a first round in a specific round of the plurality of rounds for opening the first special variable winning device 38 is controlled. It is configured to determine whether the game ball that has flowed into the special fluctuation winning device 38 has flowed into a specific area, and when starting a specific round, the first special fluctuation winning The game balls that may be flowing into the specific region in the device 38 is not present may be waiting for the start of the specific round until acknowledged. By doing so, the start of the specific round is waited until it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may flow into the specific area, so that fairness of the game can be ensured.

  Further, in step A841, it is determined whether or not it is a start of a specific round or a round to open the first special variable prize winning device 38 next to the specific round. Only when these rounds are started, whether the remaining ball counter is 0 is determined. May be checked. That is, when starting a round in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened after the specific round, the game control means (game controlling device 100) sets the specific area (probable change operation) in the first special variable winning device 38. The start of the round may be waited until it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may flow into the area 38h). In this way, the game waits until it is determined whether or not the game ball that has flowed in the specific round has flowed into the specific area, so that fairness of the game can be ensured.

  Further, when the remaining ball counter is not 0, the start of the round is waited. However, when the remaining ball counter is not 0, the start of the special game state may be waited. That is, when the result of the variable display game is a special result, the game control means (game control device 100) does not have a game ball that may flow into the specific area in the first special variable winning device 38. It may be made to wait for the start of the special game state until it is confirmed. Accordingly, the first special variable winning device 38 is not opened until it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may flow into the specific area, and the fairness of the game can be ensured.

  If it is determined that the remaining ball counter is not 0 at the start of the round in which the first special variable winning device 38 other than the specific round is opened, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened in that round. Is also good. If the specific round is a round other than the first round, and if the remaining ball counter is not 0 at the start of the round in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened (or only at the start of the specific round), the round of the round is started. A plurality of successive rounds immediately before the specific round may be set as a round for opening the second special variable winning device 39 so as to wait for the start. By doing so, it is possible to secure a sufficient time before the start of the specific round, and to ensure that the remaining balls are discharged. Further, a plurality of consecutive rounds immediately after the specific round may be rounds in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened.

[Grand Winner Opening Process Shift Setting Process 1]
FIG. 60 shows the processing shift setting processing 1 (step A860) during the opening of the special winning opening in the above-described processing during the fanfare / interval. In the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 1, first, the process number is set to “4” related to the special winning opening process (step A871), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area. (Step A872). After that, the information of the special winning opening count number area storing the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step A873), and a signal relating to the opening start of the upper winning opening (for example, turning on the special electric auditors character 1 operating signal) is turned on. ) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A874).

  Then, the upper winning award winning port ON data is saved in the special winning award solenoid output data area (step A875), and the upper winning award winning opening active information is saved in the upper winning award opening state flag area (step A876). Next, the upper winning award opening illegal winning number area is cleared to 0 (step A877), and an extra fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper winning award opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A878). The processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A879), and the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 1 ends.

[Grand prize opening opening process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 61 shows the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 2 (step A861) in the above-described fanfare / interval process. In the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 2, first, the process number is set to “4” related to the special winning opening process (step A881), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area. (Step A882). After that, the information of the special winning opening count number area storing the winning number to the special winning opening is cleared (step A883), and a signal relating to the opening start of the lower special winning opening (for example, the special motor-operated accessory 2 operating signal is turned on). ) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A884).

  Then, the lower special winning opening ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A885), and the lower special winning opening active information is saved in the lower special winning opening state flag area (step A886). Next, the lower winning award opening illegal winning number area is cleared to 0 (step A887), and a flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A888). The processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A889), and the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 2 ends.

(Processing while opening the big winning opening)
Next, details of the special winning opening processing (step A16) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, in the special winning opening process, first, it is determined whether the special winning opening data is a pattern for opening and closing (step A901). The opening / closing pattern is an opening pattern for opening / closing during one round, and in this embodiment, is a lower V opening (see FIG. 8). If the special winning opening data is a pattern that opens and closes (step A901; Y), the control pointer during the special figure is loaded and prepared (step A902). It is determined whether there is (Step A903).

  If the loaded value is not equal to or more than the value of the end pointer per special figure (step A903; N), that is, if the opening / closing operation is still performed in the currently executed round, the value of the control pointer area per special figure is incremented by +1. The process is updated (step A904), and the big hit operation transition setting process is performed (step A905), and the big winning opening opening process ends.

  As shown in FIG. 63, in the big hit operation transition setting process, a branch process is performed using the special figure hit middle control pointer (step A921). When the value of the control pointer per special figure is 0, the wait time (here, 2700 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A922), and the first special variable winning device 38 is closed. Then, the lower winning port off data is saved in the special winning port solenoid output data area (step A923), and the big hit operation transition setting processing ends.

  If the value of the control pointer per special figure is 1, the big hit V second half release time (here, 25000 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A924), and the first special variable prize winning device 38 is set. The lower winning opening data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area in order to make the opening state (step A925). Then, a long release command is prepared (step A926), an effect command setting process is performed (step A927), and the big hit operation shift setting process ends. As a result, a long release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the latter half of the lower V release, and the effect control device 300 starts a long open effect based on this command.

  Returning to FIG. 62, if the special winning opening data is not a pattern for opening and closing (step A901; N), or if the loaded value is equal to or more than the value of the end pointer per special figure (step A903; Y), it is being executed. It is determined whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current round number in the special game state with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit area (step A906).

  If it is not the last round (step A906; N), the special winning game opening timer and the interval time corresponding to the number of rounds (here, any of 300 ms, 900 ms, 1300 ms, or 2700 ms) are saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then (step A907), an interval command is prepared (step A908), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A909). Further, the process number is set to "3" for the fanfare / interval process (step A910), and the process proceeds to step A915.

  If it is the last round (step A906; Y), the special winning game opening timer and the remaining ball processing time (here, either 1300 ms or 1700 ms) corresponding to the number of rounds are saved in the special figure game processing timer area. (Step A911), an ending command is prepared (Step A912), and effect command setting processing is performed (Step A913). Further, the processing number is set to “5” relating to the special winning opening remaining ball processing (step A914), and the flow shifts to step A915.

  Then, the special winning opening remaining data and the special winning opening remaining ball processing time corresponding to the number of rounds are saved in the special winning opening remaining ball processing timer area (step A915). In this processing, if the round to be ended is a round for opening the first special variable winning device 38, the initial value of the processing time for the remaining ball of the lower winning a prize mouth is saved in the lower prize winning port remaining ball processing timer area. If the round to be ended is a round for opening the second special variable winning device 39, the initial value of the upper winning a prize port remaining ball processing time is saved in the upper prize winning port remaining sphere processing timer area.

  After that, the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A916), and in order to close the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 or the opening / closing door 39c of the second special variable winning device 39, it is necessary to save the process number. The OFF data for turning off the winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper winning opening solenoid 39b is saved in the winning opening solenoid output data area (step A917), and the processing during opening of the winning opening is ended. In step A916, the off data of the lower winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper winning opening solenoid 39b is set, but only the off winning solenoid of the special variable winning device being opened is set. You may do it.

(Grand prize mouth remaining ball processing)
Next, details of the special winning port remaining ball processing (step A17) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 64, in the special winning port remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter for managing the number of game balls remaining in the upper channel 38j of the first special variable winning device 38 is 0 ( If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step A951) (step A951; N), the special winning opening remaining ball process ends. That is, until the game balls in the upper flow path 38j of the first special fluctuation winning device 38 are all discharged, the processing does not shift from the special winning port remaining ball processing, and the special game state is not ended.

  If the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A951; Y), "6" is set as the process number related to the big hit end process (step A952), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A952). Step A953). Thereafter, an ending time (here, any of 100 ms, 2300 ms, or 2700 ms) corresponding to the special winning opening data is set and saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A954).

  Next, the information of the special winning opening count number area storing the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step A955), and the information of the round number area storing the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step A956). ), Clear the information of the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state (step A957). Then, the information of the special winning opening information area for storing the special winning opening information flag is cleared (step A956), and the middle control pointer area per special figure is cleared (step A957). The end pointer area is cleared (step A958), and the special winning port remaining ball processing ends.

  From the above, the game control means (game control device 100), when ending the special game state, a game that may flow into the specific area (probable operation area 38h) in the first special variable winning device 38. This means that the special game state is not ended until it is confirmed that the ball does not exist. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls from remaining until the next special game state, and to ensure fairness of the game. In step A951, it is checked whether the remaining ball counter is 0. In addition, it is checked whether the discharge ball counter is 0. If not, the process from step A952 is not performed. May be. That is, the special game state may be ended after it is confirmed that all the game balls in the first special variable winning device 38 have been discharged.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, details of the big hit end processing (step A18) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 65, in the big hit end processing, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1001), and the special game state of this time is based on the hit with a high probability and with a reduced working time. Is determined (step A1002). If the special game state this time is not based on the winning with high probability and working hours (step A1002; N), it is determined whether the big hit symbol is a V easy symbol (step A1003). The V-easy symbol is a symbol corresponding to 12R probability change, 5R probability change, and 4R probability change.

  If the big hit symbol is not a V-easy symbol (step A1003; N), information on the start of the time reduction mode B is prepared as the effect mode after the end of the special game state (step A1004), and the process proceeds to step A1006. In addition, when the special game state of this time is based on a hit with high probability and with a reduced working time (step A1002; Y), or when the big hit symbol is a V easy symbol (step A1003; Y), the special game is performed. Information on the start of the time reduction mode A is prepared as an effect mode after the end of the state (step A1005), and the process proceeds to step A1006.

  Then, it is determined whether there is certainty variable operation area passage information set when a game ball flows into the certainty variable operation area 38h (step A1006). If there is no certainty variable operation area passage information (Step A1006; N), the big hit end setting processing 1 is performed (Step A1007), and the process proceeds to Step A1010. In this case, the state is not in the high probability state. If there is certainty-variable operation area passage information (step A1006; Y), the big hit end setting processing 2 is performed (step A1008), and the information prepared as the effect mode after the end of the special game state is set in the ST mode (ST mode A). Or B) (Step A1009), and the process proceeds to Step A1010. In this case, the state becomes a high probability state. That is, a high probability state is established when a game ball flows into the probable variable operation area 38h regardless of the big hit symbol.

  Thereafter, an effect mode information address table is set (step A1010), and an address of the table corresponding to the prepared information is obtained (step A1011). From these pieces of information, the effect mode number of the effect mode after the end of the special game state is obtained and saved (step A1012), and the number of games in the effect mode after the end of the special game state is obtained and saved (step A1012). A1013), the next mode transition information of the effect mode after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved (step A1014). Further, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1015), and the command is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1016).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the game ball is flowing into the certain-variable operation area 38h in the special-change operation area 38h in the special game state based on the big hit symbol which is not the V-easy symbol (step A1017). If it is determined that the vehicle has not passed through the certainty-variable operation area irregularly (step A1017; N), the process proceeds to step A1019. If it is determined that the passage is the irregular passage in the irregular operation area (step A1017; Y), the irregular information is added to the probability information command (step A1018), and the process proceeds to step A1019. Then, an effect command setting process is performed (step A1019), and a probability information command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. As the probability information command transmitted here, there are a plurality of commands that include the information of the staging mode in either “high probability / with time saving” or “low probability / with time saving”, In the case of, irregular probability change information is added. Then, a game number command corresponding to the game number is prepared (step A1020), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A1021).

  Next, “0” is set as the process number related to the special figure ordinary process (step A1022), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1023). Thereafter, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot (for example, turning off one of the jackpots, turning off the three signals and turning off the four signals) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1024), and the signal relating to the end of the jackpot (eg, Then, the condition device operating signal is turned off, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 hit signal is turned off, and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned off (step A1025).

  Subsequently, the information of the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A1026), and the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the upper winning winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A1027). The flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1028). Then, the information in the certainty-variable operation area passage information area is cleared (step A1029), the information in the special figure game mode flag retreat area is cleared (step A1030), and the big hit end processing ends.

  If the special game state this time is based on the hit of the high probability state or the time saving state, the ST mode may be set as the effect mode irrespective of the presence or absence of the probable variable operation area passage information. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game, a V-easy symbol is formed with a predetermined probability, and when a big hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, all the symbols become V easy symbols. During the high-probability state and the time-saving state, the game is played by right-handing, so basically only the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. Should be. However, if a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first start memory that was present at the time of the big hit occurrence, the V easy symbol must not be a predetermined percentage at a predetermined rate despite the high probability state or the time saving state. There is.

  A player who is not familiar with the game content may understand that all the big hits in the high probability state and the time saving state will be V easy symbols, and may have a distrust of not being in the ST mode, By always shifting to the ST mode in the case of a big hit in a high probability state or a time saving state, it is possible to prevent such a mistrust. Note that the ST mode ends at a predetermined rate without a big hit even in the high probability state, so even if the ST mode is set in the low probability state, the big hit does not occur in the ST mode, so that the ST mode is uncomfortable. Does not occur.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 66 shows a big hit end setting process 1 (step A1007) in the above big hit end process. In the big hit end setting process 1, first, a signal (for example, two big hits is turned ON) relating to the start of the time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step A1041). The signal related to the start of the time saving state is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous form because it is output from the middle of the big hit. Next, a signal relating to the start of the low probability & time reduction (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 fluctuations) The time shortening state signal is turned on and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1042).

  Next, the number with the time saved is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A1043), the general figure high probability flag is saved in the general figure game mode flag area (step A1044), and the special figure game mode flag area is specially saved. The figure low probability & time saving flag is saved (step A1045). Thereafter, the high-probability fluctuation count area is cleared to 0 (step A1046), the initial value (here, 100 times) is saved in the time reduction fluctuation count area (step A1047), and the big hit end setting processing 1 ends.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 67 shows the big hit end setting process 2 (step A1008) in the above big hit end process. In the big hit end setting process 2, first, a signal relating to the start of the time saving (for example, the big hit 2 signal is turned ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1051). The signal relating to the start of the time reduction is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous form since it is output from the middle of the big hit. Next, a signal relating to the start of the high probability & time reduction (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time) The shortened state signal is turned on and the ordinary symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1052).

  Next, the number with the time saved is saved in the game state display number area (step A1053), the general figure high probability flag is saved in the general figure game mode flag area (step A1054), and the special figure game mode flag area is designated. The figure high probability & time saving flag is saved (step A1055). Thereafter, the initial value (here, 100 times) is saved in the high-probability variation count area (step A1056), and the initial value (here, 100 times) is saved in the time reduction variation count area (step A1057), and the big hit end setting is made. Processing 2 ends. Note that the game progresses by right-handing during the time reduction state, but since the player is instructed to perform right-handing during the special game state, the setting for instructing right-handing is performed in the big hit end setting processes 1 and 2. Absent.

  That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state (time saving state) for a predetermined period after the end of the special game state. In the specific game state, the operation of the normal variable prize device 37 is controlled so that the prize to the normal variable prize device 37 is easier than in the non-specific game state. The special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game, and the general figure variable display game are configured to reduce the variable time. Further, the game control device 100 forms a high-probability state generating means capable of generating a high-probability state (probable change state) for a predetermined period after the special game state ends.

[Lever solenoid control processing]
Next, the details of the lever solenoid control process (step A23) during the special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 68, in the lever solenoid control process, first, it is determined whether or not the lever solenoid control pointer is a no-update code (here, -1) (step A1101). If the lever solenoid control pointer is the no-update code (step A1101; Y), the lever solenoid control process ends. If the lever solenoid control pointer is not a no-update code (step A1101; N), the lever solenoid control timer is updated by -1 (step A1102), and it is determined whether the lever solenoid control timer has become 0 (step A1103). .

  If the lever solenoid control timer has not become 0 (step A1103; N), the lever solenoid control process ends. If the lever solenoid control timer has reached 0 (step A1103; Y), a lever solenoid control table is set (step A1104), and a table address corresponding to the lever solenoid control pointer is calculated (step A1105). Then, the control pointer of the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid control point area (step A1107), and the output data of the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid output data area (step A1108). Thereafter, the probable variable operation area validity determination flag is obtained and saved in the probable variable operation area validity determination flag area (step A1109), and the lever solenoid control process ends.

  With the above processing, the lever solenoid control pointer is sequentially updated each time a predetermined time elapses, and the ON / OFF of the lever solenoid 38f is set as shown in FIGS. The validity and invalidity of the switch 38d are set. When the operation of the lever solenoid is terminated by satisfying a predetermined condition, setting the lever solenoid control pointer to 0 turns off the lever solenoid 38f and disables the positive-variable operation area switch 38d. Then, after setting 0 as the lever solenoid control pointer, -1 is set as the lever solenoid control pointer so that the operation is stopped.

[PB gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the PB gate switch monitoring process (step A5) during the special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the PB gate switch monitoring processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input from the PB gate switch (step A1031). The process ends. If there is an input from the PB gate switch (step A1031; Y), the PB input mode number is switched between the manual input mode and the automatic input mode (step A1032). That is, in the case of the manual input mode, the PB input mode number (for example, 0) of the automatic input mode is set. In the case of the automatic input mode, a PB input mode number (for example, 1) of the manual input mode is set.

  Next, a PB input mode information command corresponding to the PB input mode number is prepared (step A1033), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A1034). Thereby, the information of the set PB input mode is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 performs processing such as displaying the mode name on the display device 41 based on the information. Then, it is determined whether the PB input mode number is a manual input mode number (step A1035).

  If the PB input mode number is not the manual input mode number (step A1035; N), that is, if it is the auto input mode number, the initial value (500 ms here) is saved in the PB command control timer area (step A1036). The PB command number area is cleared to 0 (step A1037), and the PB gate switch monitoring processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the PB input mode number is a manual input mode number (step A1035; Y), 1 is saved in the PB command number area (step A1038), and the PB command corresponding to the PB command number (here, the PB off command) Is prepared (step A1039). Then, effect command setting processing is performed (step A1040), and the PB gate switch monitoring processing ends.

[PB input command editing processing]
Next, details of the PB input command editing processing (step A24) during the special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 70, in the PB input command editing process, first, it is determined whether or not the automatic input mode is being performed (step A1051). In this case, the PB input command editing process ends. If the automatic input mode is being performed (step A1051; Y), it is determined whether the special figure change display game is changing (step A1052).

  If the special figure change display game is not changing (step A1052; N), the PB input command editing process ends. If the special figure change display game is changing (step A1052; Y), if the PB command control timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step A1053), and whether the PB command control timer times out (0). Is determined) (step A1054).

  If the PB command control timer has not expired (step A1054; N), the PB input command editing process ends. When the PB command control timer times out (step A1054; Y), a PB command corresponding to the PB command number is prepared (step A1055), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A1056). Then, the initial value (here, 500 ms) is saved in the PB command control timer area (step A1057), the PB command number is updated by +1 (step A1059), and the PB input command editing process ends.

  By the above processing, in the automatic input mode, the PB on command instructing the effect control device 300 to consider that the operation means is operated, and the PB off command instructing that the operation means is not operated. Commands are sent alternately. The PB command control timer is a timer for managing an interval for transmitting the PB on command and the PB off command, and the PB command number is information that defines which of the PB on command and the PB off command is transmitted. The PB command number area is configured to be updated (looped) in the range of 0 to 255. In the case of an even number (here, including 0), a PB on command is transmitted, and in the case of an odd number, a PB off command is transmitted. It is supposed to be.

  By transmitting the PB on command and the PB off command alternately in this manner, the effect control device 300 proceeds with the effect assuming that the operation means is being operated intermittently. That is, the PB command (PB off command and PB off command) makes a pseudo operation command that enables the effect to be changed in the same manner as when an operation signal based on the operation of the operation means is input. Further, the PB on command gives a start command for instructing the start of the operation of the operation means, and the PB off command gives a termination command for instructing the end of the operation of the operation means.

  The operation means includes an effect button 25 for receiving a pressing operation input from the player, and a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player. In addition, the touch panel 29 is configured to separately receive contact operation inputs for eight areas. The effect control device 300 recognizes whether or not there is an operation input for each of the nine operation inputs. However, when the PB ON command is received, it is determined that there is an operation input for all of the nine operation inputs. When a PB off command is received, all nine operation inputs are regarded as having no operation input.

  FIG. 71 shows an output mode of the PB command in the automatic input mode. When the variation display of the special figure variation display game is started, an initial value (here, 500 ms) is set in the PB command control timer area (t111), and when the time is up, a PB on command is transmitted (t112). At this time, an initial value (here, 500 ms) is set in the PB command control timer area (t112), and when the time is up, a PB off command is transmitted (t113). Thereafter, each time a predetermined time (500 ms in this case) elapses, a PB on command and a PB off command are alternately transmitted. When the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation display game ends, a PB off command is transmitted regardless of the value of the PB command control timer or the type of the PB command transmitted immediately before (t117).

[Direction command setting processing]
Next, the details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 72, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2001), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002). If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2001). If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2002; N), command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2003).

  Next, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2004), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005). If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2004). If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2005; N), the command data (ACTION) is written into the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2006), and the effect command setting process ends. The effect command setting process may be simply referred to as “command setting process”.

[Symbol variation control processing]
FIG. 73 shows a symbol variation control process (steps A20 and A22) in the above-described special figure game process, and a symbol variation control process (step B15) in the after-mentioned general-purpose game process. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) or a normal symbol (common symbol) and setting display data of the special symbol or the normal symbol.

  In the symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether or not the variation control flag for the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special figure, the second special figure, and the ordinary figure) is changing (step A2101). . In the case of the present embodiment, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value, and the display table 2 (in the fluctuation control table prepared in step A18, step A20, and step B14). (For stop) and the address of the display table 1 (for fluctuation) are defined.

  If the changing flag for the control target symbol is changing (step A2102; Y), a symbol display table (for change) corresponding to the control target symbol is acquired (step A2103). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for fluctuation) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A18, step A20, and step B14. Next, the blink control timer to be controlled is updated by -1 (step A2104), and it is determined whether the updated blink control timer is "0" (step A2105), and the updated blink control timer is "0". If not (step A2105; N), display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is obtained (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control processing ends.

  If the updated flashing control timer is “0” (step A2105; Y), the flashing control timer initial value (here, 100 ms) is saved in the target flashing timer area (step A2106), and The variable symbol number is updated by +1 (step A2107), and display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is obtained (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area provided in the RAM 111C (step A2111), and the symbol variation control processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the in-flight flag related to the symbol to be controlled is not changing (step A2102; N), a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step A2109). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A18, step A20, and step B14. Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stopped symbol number area to be controlled is obtained (step A2110), the obtained display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control processing ends.

[Public figure game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (step S111) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the general-figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire processing related to the general-figure variation display game is controlled, and the setting of the general-figure display is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 74, in the general game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and a general power winning switch for monitoring an input from the starting port 2 switch 37a. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the ordinary game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). Note that the minimum value of the ordinary game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the general-purpose game processing timer has become “0” (step B4).

  If the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is “0” (step B4; Y), that is, if it is determined that the time has elapsed or the time has already elapsed, the process is referred to branch to the process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number. A process (step B5) of setting a general-purpose game sequence branch table in a register is performed, and a process (step B6) of obtaining a branch destination address of a process corresponding to a general-purpose game process number using the table is performed. Then, a subroutine call is made in accordance with the general game processing number (step B7).

  In step B7, when the general-figure game processing number is “0”, the start of the fluctuation of the general-figure fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of the fluctuation start and the effect of the general-figure fluctuation display game are set. A general-purpose routine process (step B8) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed. If the general-figure game processing number is “1” in step B7, the general-figure change processing (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the general-figure display processing is performed.

  Also, in step B7, if the general-figure game processing number is “2”, if the result of the general-figure change display game is a hit, the setting of the general power release time according to whether or not the time saving state is in effect Or, a general-figure displaying process (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the general-floor hitting process is performed. If the general game processing number is "3" in step B7, the normal game hitting process is performed to continue the normal game hitting process or to set information necessary for performing the normal power remaining ball process. The processing (step B11) is performed.

  If the general-purpose game processing number is "4" in step B7, the general-purpose remaining sphere process (step B12) for setting information necessary for performing the general-purpose end process is performed. If the general-purpose game process number is "5" in step B7, a general-purpose hit end process (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing the general-purpose normal process is performed.

  Then, after preparing a general symbol variation control table for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 74 (step B14), a symbol variation control process (step B14) relating to the control of the variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal symbol display is performed. B15) is performed, and the ordinary map game process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is not “0” (step B4; N), that is, if it is determined that the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processing is performed. Do.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 75, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether the game state is a right-handed gaming state (for example, during a big hit, during special figure time reduction (general power support)) (step B102). .

  When the game state is a right-handed game state (step B102; Y), the number of general-purpose reservations is acquired, and it is determined whether the number of general-purpose reservations is less than the upper limit (for example, “4”) (step B105). If the game mode is not a right-handed gaming state (step B102; N), a left-handed instruction command is prepared (step B103), and after effect command setting processing (step B104), the number of ordinary drawing reservations is acquired. It is determined whether the number of ordinary drawing reservations is less than the upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step B105).

  If the number of reserved general drawing is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the number of reserved general drawing is updated by +1 (step B106), and the address of the hit random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved general drawing is calculated. (Step B107). Then, the winning random number is extracted, saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (step B108), the winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in the winning symbol random number storing area of the RWM (step B109), and the gate switch monitoring process is performed. To end.

  If it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or if it is determined in step B105 that the number of ordinary drawing reservations is not less than the upper limit (step B105; N), The gate switch monitoring process ends.

[Public winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the ordinary winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-described ordinary figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 76, in the normal winning switch monitoring process, first, during the normal winning, that is, the normal changing display game is in a hit state, and the normal changing winning device 37 is performing a predetermined number of opening operations. It is determined whether there is (Step B201). Then, when the vehicle is in the normal position (step B201; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B202), and there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B202; Y). Is determined, the count value of the ordinary power counter is updated by +1 (step B203).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated ordinary power counter is equal to or more than an upper limit value (for example, “6”) (step B204), and it is determined that the count number is equal to or more than the upper limit value (step B204; Y). Then, a hit end pointer value (4 or 7 in this case) is loaded from the ordinary figure end pointer area and saved in the ordinary figure inside control pointer area (step B205). Then, the general-purpose game processing timer is cleared to 0 (step B206), and the general-purpose winning switch monitoring process ends. In other words, if there is a general winning of a prize equal to or more than the upper limit during the hit state of the ordinary figure, the hit state of the ordinary figure ends at that point.

  Also, when it is determined in step B201 that the vehicle is not in the normal position (step B201; N), when it is determined in step B202 that there is no input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B202; N), or in step B204. If it is determined that the ordinary power count number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step B204; N), the ordinary power winning switch monitoring process ends.

(Normal map everyday processing)
Next, the details of the ordinary figure ordinary processing (step B8) in the aforementioned ordinary figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 77, in the ordinary figure ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether the number of ordinary figure reservations is “0” (step B301), and when the number of ordinary figure reservations is “0” (step B301; Y). ) Sets "0" as the process number for shifting to the normal map normal process (step B322), and saves the process number in the general map game process number area (step B323). Thereafter, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area (step B324), and the normal processing is terminated.

  If the number of reserved symbols is not “0” (step B301; N), random numbers are loaded from the winning random number storage area of RWM (for reserved number 1) and the winning symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1). Then, the hit random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) and the winning symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) are cleared to 0 (step B302). Next, it is determined whether the probability of a winning result in the general-floor variation display game is higher than the normal probability (that is, the general low-probability) during the general-figure high probability, that is, whether the vehicle is in the time-saving state. (Step B303).

  If it is not during the high figure probabilities (step B303; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower judgment value) at the time of the low figure probabilities is set (step B304), and if the high figure probabilities are high (step B303). ; Y) sets a lower-limit judgment value (high-probability lower-limit judgment value) at the time of ordinary high probability (step B305). Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B306). If the value of the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B306; Y), that is, if the value is out of step, step B308 is performed. Move to

  If the value of the hit random number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B306; N), it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307). If the value of the hit random number is less than the step lower limit determination value (step B307; Y), that is, if it is a loss, save the loss information in the hit flag area (step B308) and set a loss stop symbol number (step B308). B309), the lost symbol information is saved in the ordinary symbol stopped symbol information area (step B310), and the stopped symbol number is saved in the ordinary symbol stopped symbol area (step B314).

  On the other hand, if the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), that is, if it is a hit, hit information is saved in a hit flag area (step B311). The hit stop symbol number corresponding to the hit symbol random number loaded in B302 is set (step B312), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (step B313), and the stop symbol is set. The number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B314). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are two types of hit symbols, a hit symbol 1 that becomes an open pattern 1 and a hit symbol 2 that becomes an open pattern 2.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the probability of a hit at the time of low probability of public figure is 0/251, the probability of a hit at the time of high probability of public figure is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is “251”, and the lower probability lower limit judgment value is “251” and the high probability lower limit determination value are “1”. Therefore, at the time of the low probability of the normal figure, the value is shifted when the value of the hit random number is all “0” to “250”. In addition, at the time of high probability of the normal figure, a case where the value of the hit random number is any one of “1” to “250” is a hit, and a case where the value of the hit random number is “0” is a miss.

  After the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B314), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315). Thereafter, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B316), the empty area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B317), and the number of ordinary drawing reservations is updated by -1 (step B318). In other words, the process of moving up the ranks of the reserved number of ordinary drawings 2 to 4 that are suspended after the reserved number of ordinary figure 1 by one with the execution of the public figure change display game relating to the oldest reserved number of ordinary figure 1 I do. By this processing, the value for the number of ordinary figure reservations 2 to the number of ordinary figure reservations 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is moved from the number 1 for ordinary figure retention to the number 3 for ordinary figure retention in the random number storage area per ordinary figure. Will be done. Then, the value for the number 4 of ordinary figure reservation in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the number of ordinary figure reservation is decremented by one.

  Next, a variation pattern random number 3 is extracted (step B319), and a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3 is set and saved in a general-purpose game processing timer area (step B320). Here, as the fluctuation time, 500 ms is selected at 200/256, 1500 ms is selected at 40/256, and 3000 ms is selected at 16/256. After that, a normal-figure-variable-process transition setting processing (step B321) is performed, and the normal-figure normal processing ends.

[Process shift setting process during normal fluctuation]
FIG. 78 shows the process of setting a transition to a normal figure changing process (step B321). In the normal figure change processing transition setting processing, first, "1" is set as the processing number for shifting to the normal figure change processing (step B341), and the processing number is saved in the general figure game processing number area (step B341). Step B342). After that, a signal relating to the start of the normal figure variable display game (for example, the normal symbol 1 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B343), indicating that the general figure change display game is changing. The fluctuating flag is saved in the normal figure fluctuation control flag area (step B344).

  Then, the initial value (100 ms in this case) of the blinking control timer, which is the initial value of the blinking period timer of the ordinary figure display 74, is saved in the ordinary figure blinking control timer area (step B345), and is initialized in the ordinary figure changing symbol number area. The value (here, 0) is saved (step B346), and the normal-fluctuating process shift setting process ends.

[Processing during normal map fluctuation]
Next, the details of the general figure changing process (step B9) in the general figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 79, in the general figure changing process, first, the process number is set to “2” as a setting process for shifting to the general figure displaying process (step B411), and the process number is set to the general figure game process number. Save to the area (step B412). After that, the general-figure display time (for example, 600 ms), which is the display time of the result of the general-figure change display game on the general-figure display 74, is saved in the general-figure game processing timer area (step B413), and the end of the fluctuation of the general-figure is displayed. The signal (for example, the signal during normal symbol 1 fluctuation is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B414), and a stop flag indicating that the general graphic fluctuation display game is being stopped is stored in the general graphic fluctuation control flag area. The process is saved (step B415), and the routine-during-change process ends.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the general figure display processing (step B10) in the above general figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 80, in the process of displaying a normal figure, first, the hit flag (hit information or out-of-position information) set in the normal process of the normal figure is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

  If the hit flag is not the hit information (step B503; N), "0" is set as the process number for shifting to the normal drawing ordinary process (step B515), and the process number is saved in the general drawing game process number area. (Step B516). Thereafter, the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the ordinary telephone illegal monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the process of displaying the general figure is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), a hitting process setting table is set (step B504), and hit start pointer values (here, 0 and 5) corresponding to the ordinary symbol stop symbol information. ) Is obtained and saved in the control pointer area during normal drawing (step B505). Next, a hit end pointer value (in this case, either 4 or 7) corresponding to the general symbol stop symbol information is obtained and saved in the general symbol end symbol area (step B506), and the corresponding symbol corresponding to the general symbol stop symbol information is obtained. Then, the general power release time (in this case, either 1700 ms or 2600 ms) is obtained and saved in the general game processing timer area (step B507).

After that, "3" is set as the process number for shifting to the normal drawing hitting process (step B508), and the process number is saved in the general figure game process number area (step B509). After that, a signal relating to the start per ordinary figure (for example, the normal signal per normal symbol is ON) and a signal relating to the start of the ordinary electric operation (eg, the ordinary electric accessory 1 active signal is turned ON) are stored in the test signal output data area. Save (step B510).
Further, in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the general-purpose solenoid, the on-data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area (step B511), and the general-purpose count number for storing the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37. The information of the area is cleared (step B512), and the information of the number of illegally won prize money area storing the number of prizes to the ordinary variable prize device 37 during the illegally monitored fraudulent period is cleared (step B513). Then, a flag (out-of-fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the ordinary variable prize device 37 is saved in the ordinary telephone fraud monitoring period flag area (step B514), and the process of displaying the ordinary figure ends.

[Medium processing per drawing]
Next, a detailed description will be given of the during-normal-drawing process (step B11) in the above-described general-purpose game processing. As shown in FIG. 81, in the normal time per hit figure processing, first, the normal time per hit figure control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the loaded normal time per hit figure control pointer is equal to or more than the upper limit value. Is determined (step B602).

  If the value of the control pointer during normal operation is not equal to or more than the upper limit value (step B602; N), the control pointer during normal operation is updated by +1 (step B603), and the normal power operation transition setting process (step B604) is performed. Then, the middle processing for normal drawing ends. On the other hand, when the value of the control pointer during normal operation is not less than the upper limit value (step B602; Y), the process of updating the control pointer area during normal operation in step B603 by +1 is not performed, and the normal power operation transition is performed. The setting process (step B604) is performed, and the process for hitting the ordinary figure ends.

(Privilege operation transition setting process)
FIG. 82 shows the ordinary power operation shift setting process (step B604) in the above-described ordinary time per hit process. The normal power operation shift setting process is a process of controlling the drive of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (control pointer during normal time). Like that. In the normal power operation shift setting process, first, a branch process according to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B611). The value of the control pointer used here is the value loaded in step B601, and is the value before updating +1 in step B603.

  If the value of the control pointer is 0, 2, or 5, the process proceeds to step B612 to control the closing of the normal variable prize device 37 corresponding to the control pointer to control the closing of the normal variable prize device 37. The subsequent wait time (here, 300 ms) is saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B612), and OFF data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area to turn off the general-purpose solenoid 37c (step B613). Then, the normal power operation transfer setting process ends.

  If the value of the control pointer is either 1 or 3, the process proceeds to step B614 to open the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37. The general power release time (1700 ms in this case) is saved in the general game processing timer area (step B614), and the ON data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area to turn on the general electric solenoid 37c ( Step B615), the normal power operation shift setting process ends.

  If the value of the control pointer is 6, the process moves to step B616 to control the opening of the ordinary variable prize device 37. The opening time (here, 2600 ms) is saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B616), and the ON data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area to turn on the general-purpose solenoid 37c (step B617). The power operation transfer setting process ends.

  If the value of the control pointer is either 4 or 7, the process proceeds to step B618 to end the opening control of the ordinary variable prize device 37 and perform the ordinary electric sphere processing. "4" is set (step B618). Then, this processing number is saved in the general-purpose game processing number area (step B619), and the general-purpose remaining sphere processing time (here, 600 ms) is saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B620). After that, in order to turn off the general-purpose solenoid 37c, the off-data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area (step B621), and the general-purpose operation shift setting process ends.

  FIG. 83 shows the operation of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 controlled by the above-described processing. FIG. 83 (a) shows a case where the result is a hit symbol 1 (open pattern 1). When the fluctuating time of the general fluctuating display game ends (t81), and when the general fluctuating display time for displaying the winning result elapses (t82), the winning state is started and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened.

  In the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, opening (t82 to t83, t84 to t85, t86 to t87) for 1700 ms and closing (300 to t84, t85 to t86) for 300 ms are alternately performed. When the third opening is completed (t87), the remaining ball processing time becomes 600 ms (t87 to t88), and then the ending time becomes 100 ms (t88 to t89). When the ending time ends (t89), the hit state ends and a new general-purpose variation display game can be executed.

  FIG. 83 (b) shows a case where the result is a hit symbol 2 (open pattern 2). When the fluctuating time of the general fluctuating display game ends (t91), and when the general fluctuating display time for displaying the winning result elapses (t92), the winning state is started and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened. In the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the opening (t92 to t93, t94 to t95) of 2600 ms is performed with the closing (t93 to t94) of 300 ms interposed therebetween. When the second opening is completed (t95), the remaining ball processing time becomes 600 ms (t95 to t96), and then the ending time becomes 100 ms (t96 to t97). When the ending time ends (t97), the hit state ends and a new general-purpose variation display game can be executed.

  In the case where a predetermined number (6 in this case) of game balls have won the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 in any open pattern, the opening of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is terminated at that time, and the remaining ball processing is performed. Time.

(Puden residual sphere treatment)
Next, the details of the ordinary power remaining sphere process (step B12) in the ordinary game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 84, in the normal-power remaining sphere process, first, a process number “5” relating to the general-purpose hit end process is set (step B711), and the process number is saved in a general-purpose game process number area (step B711). Step B712).

  Next, the general figure ending time (100 msec in this case) is saved in the general figure game processing timer area (step B713), and a signal (for example, a normal electric accessory 1 operating signal) relating to the end of the operation of the normal variable winning device 37 is stored. OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B714), and the ordinary power count number area for counting the number of wins to the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B715). Then, the control pointer area during the ordinary figure is cleared (step B716), the end pointer area for the ordinary figure is cleared (step B717), and the ordinary electric remaining sphere process ends.

[End processing per map]
Next, the details of the per-figure-per-end processing (step B13) in the above-mentioned perforated figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 85, in the per-figure-period end processing, first, a processing number “0” related to the usual-figure ordinary processing is set (step B811), and the processing number is saved in the general-figure game processing number area (step B811). B812).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the hit of the normal-floating display game (for example, the normal signal per normal symbol is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B813), and the fraud monitoring period of the normal-variation winning device 37 is defined. The flag (the flag during the illegal monitoring period) is saved in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B814), and the end processing per ordinary figure ends.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (step S112) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold display 54, the special figure 2 hold display 55, the general figure hold display 75, the first game state display section 76, the second game state display provided on the collective display device 50 are provided. The setting related to the driving of the segment LEDs constituting the section 77, the third game state display section 78, and the round display section 60 is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 86, in the segment LED editing process, first, the blink control timer is updated by +1 (step S501), and it is determined whether or not the output ON timing is based on whether a specific bit of the blink control timer is 1 or not. (Step S502). In this embodiment, when the bit 5 of the blink control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on, so that a blink period of 128 ms is created.

  If it is the output ON timing (step S502; Y), the general figure reservation number display table 1 of the general figure reservation number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode on the general figure reservation display is specified is set. (Step S503) If it is not the output ON timing (Step S502; N), the ordinary figure reservation number display table 2 is set (Step S504). Then, the display data corresponding to the number of the general-use reservations is acquired from the set general-use reservation number display table, and is saved in the segment area for the general-use reservation display provided in the RAM 111C (step S505). In the present embodiment, if the number of ordinary figure reservations is any one of “0” to “2”, the display data is the same regardless of which ordinary figure reservation number display table is set.

  Next, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S506). If the output is on timing (step S506; Y), the special figure 1 reservation number in which the display mode on the special figure 1 reservation display is specified is determined. Of the display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (step S507), and if it is not the output ON timing (step S506; N), the special figure 1 hold number display table 2 is set (step S506; N). Step S508). Then, display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired from the set special figure 1 hold number display table, and is saved in the segment area for the special figure 1 hold display provided in the RAM 111C (step S509).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the output is on (step S510). If the output is on (step S510; Y), the special figure 2 reservation number display in which the display mode on the special figure 2 reservation display is specified is determined. Of the tables 1 and 2, the special figure 2 reserved number display table 1 is set (step S511), and if it is not the output ON timing (step S510; N), the special figure 2 reserved number display table 2 is set (step S510). S512). Then, display data corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is acquired from the set special figure 2 reservation number display table, and saved in the segment area for the special figure 2 reservation display provided in the RAM 111C (step S513). Further, a round display table in which the display mode on the round display unit is defined is set (step S514), display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is obtained, and a segment for the round display unit provided in the RAM 111C is provided. The data is saved in the area (step S515).

  Next, the game state display table 1 is set, in which the display mode on the first game state display unit 76 that lights up when the time reduction state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time reduction state is defined (step S516), and the game state display number Is obtained and saved in the segment area for the first game state display section 76 provided in the RAM 111C (step S517). In the present embodiment, the first game state display section 76 composed of one LED is configured to be turned off during normal operation and turned on during special figure time reduction (during normal power support).

  After that, the game state display table 2 is set, in which the display mode in the second game state display unit 77 for notifying that the right-handed game is more advantageous than the left-handed game state is set (step S518). The display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is obtained and saved in the segment area for the second game state display unit 77 provided in the RAM 111C (step S519). In the present embodiment, the second game state display unit 77 composed of one LED is turned off when the player hits normally (left), and when the player hits right (in the present embodiment, during the big hit and during the normal power support). It is configured to be turned on.

  Then, it is determined whether or not a high probability notification flag that is turned on when the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on is turned on (step S520), and the high probability notification flag is turned on. If it is (step S520; Y), the OFF data of the high-probability notification LED (third game state display unit 78) is saved in the segment area, and the segment LED editing process ends.

[Abnormal discharge monitoring processing]
Next, details of the abnormal discharge monitoring process (step S113) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, the number of game balls existing in each of the upper flow path 38j and the lower flow path 38k is managed, and when discharge is detected even though the number of existing game balls is 0, an abnormal discharge error is generated. Processing and processing related to the release of the abnormal discharge error are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 87, in the abnormal discharge monitoring process, first, it is determined whether an abnormal discharge error is occurring (step S551). When an abnormal discharge error is occurring, an abnormal discharge error flag is set in the abnormal discharge error flag area.Here, whether or not an abnormal discharge error is occurring is determined by the presence or absence of the abnormal discharge error flag. judge. If an abnormal discharge error is not occurring (step S551; N), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the lower large winning opening switch (step S552). If there is no input (step S552; N), the process proceeds to step S554. I do. If there is an input to the lower large winning opening switch (step S552; Y), the abnormal discharge counter 1 that manages the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is updated by +1 (step S553), and the process proceeds to step S554. .

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the probable operation area switch 38d (step S554). If there is no input (step S554; N), the process proceeds to step S558. If there is an input to the probable change operation area switch 38d (step S554; Y), the abnormal discharge counter 2 for managing the number of game balls in the lower flow path 38k is updated by +1 (step S555), and the abnormal discharge counter 1 is reset. It is determined whether the value is 0 (step S556).

  If the abnormal discharge counter 1 is 0 (step S556; Y), the process proceeds to step S565 to perform processing when an abnormality occurs. In the process at the time of occurrence of an abnormality, an abnormal ejection error flag is prepared (Step S565), an abnormal ejection occurrence command is prepared (Step S566), and the routine goes to Step S572. That is, in this case, although the abnormal discharge counter 1 that manages the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is 0, the input to the positive-variable operation area switch 38d that detects game balls flowing out of the upper flow path 38j is input. Since there is an error, processing is performed when an abnormality occurs.

  On the other hand, if the abnormal discharge counter 1 is not 0 (step S556; N), the abnormal discharge counter 1 is updated by -1 (step S557), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the passage switch 38g (step S558). When there is no input to the passage switch 38g (step S558; N), the process proceeds to step S562. When there is an input to the passage switch 38g (step S558; Y), it is determined whether the abnormal discharge counter 1 is 0 (step S560). If the abnormal discharge counter 1 is 0 (step S560; Y), the process proceeds to step S565 to perform processing when an abnormality occurs. That is, in this case, although the abnormal discharge counter 1 that manages the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is 0, there is no input to the passage switch 38g that detects game balls flowing out of the upper flow path 38j. Therefore, the processing at the time of occurrence of the abnormality is performed.

  If the abnormal discharge counter 1 is not 0 (step S560; N), the abnormal discharge counter 1 is updated by -1 (step S561), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S562). If there is no input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S562; N), the process proceeds to step S570. If there is an input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S562; Y), it is determined whether the abnormal discharge counter 2 is 0 (step S563). If the abnormal discharge counter 2 is 0 (step S563; Y), the process proceeds to step S565 to perform processing when an abnormality occurs. That is, in this case, even though the abnormal discharge counter 2 that manages the number of game balls in the lower flow path 38k is 0, an input is made to the discharge confirmation switch 38e that detects game balls discharged from the lower flow path 38k. Since there is an error, processing is performed when an abnormality occurs.

  If the abnormal discharge counter 2 is not 0 (step S563; N), the abnormal discharge counter 2 is updated by -1 (step S561), and the process proceeds to step S570. In this case, no abnormality has occurred. After that, an abnormal discharge release flag is prepared (step S570), an abnormal discharge release command is prepared (step S571), and the routine goes to a step S572.

  On the other hand, if an abnormal ejection error is occurring (step S551; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the initialization switch 112 (step S567). If there is no input (step S567; N), the abnormal ejection is performed. The monitoring process ends. In this case, the state where the abnormal discharge error is occurring continues. If there is an input to the initialization switch (step S567; Y), as a process for canceling the abnormal discharge error, the abnormal discharge counter 1 is cleared to 0 (step S568), and the abnormal discharge counter 2 is cleared to 0 (step S568). S569). Thereafter, an abnormal discharge release flag is prepared (step S570), an abnormal discharge release command is prepared (step S571), and it is determined whether the value of the abnormal discharge error flag area matches the prepared flag (step S572).

  If the value of the abnormal discharge error flag area matches the prepared flag (step S572; Y), the abnormal discharge monitoring process ends. If the value of the abnormal discharge error flag area does not match the prepared flag (step S572; N), the prepared flag is saved in the abnormal discharge error flag area (step S573), and effect command setting processing is performed (step S573). S574). Thereby, either the abnormal discharge generation command or the abnormal discharge release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 notifies that an abnormal discharge error is occurring in response to receiving the abnormal discharge generation command. Since this abnormal ejection error is an error for stopping the game, the progress of the effect is also stopped, and the error notification is continuously performed during the occurrence of the abnormal ejection error. In addition, the effect of the game is restarted in response to receiving the abnormal ejection release command, and the notification that the abnormal ejection error is occurring is ended.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the new flag is an abnormal discharge release flag (step S574). If the new flag is not an abnormal discharge release flag (step S574; N), the abnormal discharge monitoring process ends. If the flag is an abnormal discharge release flag (step S574; Y), that is, if the abnormal discharge error is released based on the operation of the initialization switch 112, it is determined whether or not a customer waiting demonstration is being performed. If the customer waiting demonstration is not being performed (step S576; N), the abnormal emission monitoring process ends. If a customer waiting demonstration is being performed (step S576; Y), a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step S577), an effect command setting process is performed (step S578), and the abnormal discharge monitoring process ends. The game is resumed with the release of the abnormality occurrence error. However, when the game is in the customer waiting demonstration mode at the time of resuming, the command is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 in another process. By sending a customer waiting demo command to the client, a demonstration in a customer waiting demo state is started.

[Magnet fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the magnet illegality monitoring process (step S114) in the timer interrupt process will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

  As shown in FIG. 88, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on, that is, abnormal. It is determined whether or not the magnetism has been detected (step S601). When the magnetic sensor 61 is on (step S601; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet irregularity monitoring timer that measures the period of detecting abnormal magnetism is updated by +1 (step S602), and the timer is updated. It is determined whether the time has elapsed (step S603). In the case of the present embodiment, it is determined that the time has expired when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is 32 ms or more.

  If the timer of the magnet fraud monitoring timer has expired (step S603; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S604), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value ( (For example, 60 seconds) is saved in the magnet improper notification timer area (step S605). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step S606), a magnet fraud flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. (Step S613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, eight interruptions), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, if the magnetic sensor 61 is not on (step S601; N), that is, if no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet illegal monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet illegal If the notification timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S609). Note that the minimum value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet improper notification timer is “0” (step S610). When the timer for monitoring unauthorized access to the magnet has not expired (step S603; N), the process also proceeds to step S609.

  Then, if the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not “0” (step S610; N), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is “0” (step S610; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and when the period of the fraudulent notification has ended or the fraud has been started from the beginning, If the notification has not been performed, a command for ending the magnet fraudulent notification is prepared (step S611). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S612), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613).

  When the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. If the prepared magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step S614), and effect command setting processing is performed. (Step S615), the magnet illegal monitoring process ends. Here, "step S601; N" → "step S608" → "step S609" → "step S610; Y" → "step S611" → "step S612" → "step S613; Y" is a normal route.

(Panel radio fraud monitoring processing)
Next, details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S115) in the above timer interrupt process will be described. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

  As shown in FIG. 89, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121, It is determined whether or not the panel radio wave sensor 62 is turned on, that is, a state in which an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701). If the radio wave sensor is on (step S701; Y), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step S702).

  Then, a command for informing the radio wave fraudulent information is prepared (step S703), and a fraudulent radio wave occurrence flag is prepared as a fraudulent radio wave flag (step S704). It is determined whether they match (step S709). That is, in the case of magnetic irregularities, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, in the case of panel radio waves, the ON of the panel radio sensor 62 is detected once. At this point, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, if the panel radio wave sensor 62 is not on (step S701; N), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud time is -1 unless it is "0". Update (step S705). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is “0” (step S706).

  If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not “0” (step S706; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process ends. Further, when the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is “0” (step S706; Y), that is, when the time has expired or the time has already expired and the period of the fraudulent notification has expired or the fraud has been detected from the beginning, If the notification has not been made, a command for ending the fraudulent radio wave notification is prepared (step S707), and a fraudulent radio wave release flag is prepared as a fraudulent radio wave flag (step S708). It is determined whether the value matches the value in the panel radio wave flag area (step S709).

  If the prepared panel radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the panel radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; Y), the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process ends. If the prepared panel radio wave illegal flag does not match the value of the panel radio wave illegal flag area (step S709; N), the prepared panel radio wave illegal flag is saved in the panel radio wave illegal flag area (step S710), and the production command A setting process is performed (step S711), and the board radio wave unauthorized monitoring process ends. Here, "step S701; N" → "step S705" → "step S706; Y" → "step S707" → "step S708" → "step S709; Y" is a normal route.

[External information editing processing]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (step S116) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the external information editing process, based on the monitoring result in each process, a process of creating information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test shooting test device and setting the information in an output buffer is performed. .

  As shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, in the external information editing process, first, it is determined whether or not a switch abnormality error such as disconnection of a switch connector is occurring (step S751). In step S751; N), the OFF data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S752), and the flow shifts to step S754. If a switch abnormality error is occurring (step S751; Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S753), and the flow shifts to step S754.

  If no glass frame opening error has occurred (step S754; N) and if no body frame opening error has occurred (step S755; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is stored in the external information output data area. The saving is performed (step S756), the OFF data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S757), and the process proceeds to step S760. On the other hand, if a glass frame opening error is occurring (step S754; Y) or if a body frame opening error is occurring (step S755; Y), the ON data of the door / frame opening signal is externally output. The data is saved in the information output data area (step S758), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S759), and the process proceeds to step S760.

  Then, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not “0”, −1 is updated ( Step S760). Note that the initial value of the security signal control timer is set at the time of setting the RAM initial value when the RAM processing is started in the main processing, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S761).

  If the value of the security signal control timer is not “0” (step S761; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S762), and step S763 Move to the processing of. If the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S761; Y), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already elapsed, the process of step S762 is not performed, and the process of step S763 is skipped. Transition.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 91, an abnormality detection error, an illegal magnet, an invalid panel radio wave, a remaining ball error, an ejected ball error, a V abnormal passage error, an incorrect upper-prize winning opening, an incorrect lower-prize winning opening, an illegal regular electric power, and vibration. When at least one of the frauds is occurring (at least one of steps S763 to S772 is Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S773), and the ON data of the security signal is saved. Is saved in the external information output data area (step S776), and the flow shifts to step S777. That is, the occurrence of the error is output as external information.

  On the other hand, abnormal detection errors, illegal magnets, illegal board radio waves, residual ball errors, ejected ball errors, V abnormal passage errors, illegal upper-prize winning openings, illegal lower-prize winning entrances, irregularities in ordinary power, and illegal vibrations have occurred. If not (all of steps S763 to S772 are N), the process proceeds to step S774. If no frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S774; N) and there is no certainty variable operation area abnormal passage information (step S775; N), the process proceeds to step S777. In addition, when the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S774; Y) or when there is the abnormally variable operation area abnormal passage information (step S775; Y), the security data ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step S776). ), And proceed to step S777. That is, the occurrence of the error is output as external information.

  Then, a main prize ball signal editing process (step S777) for setting information relating to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a starting port signal editing process (step S778) for editing a winning port winning signal is performed. Next, if the symbol determination frequency control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the number of times of execution of the special figure change display game is not “0”, −1 is updated (step S779). The minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number control timer is “0” (step S780).

  When the value of the symbol determination number control timer is “0” (step S780; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination number signal is saved in the external information output data area. Then (step S781), the external information editing process ends. If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not "0" (step S780; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the ON data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S780). S781), and ends the external information editing processing.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step S777) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. In the main prize ball signal editing process, the main prize ball signal generated each time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) is externally processed. This is the process of outputting to the device.

  As shown in FIG. 92, in the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S831). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the main award ball signal output control timer is “0” (step S832). When the value of the main award ball signal output control timer is “0” (step S832; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of output of the main award ball signal is “0” (step S833).

If the main prize ball signal output count is not “0” (step S833; N), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by −1 (step S834), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area stores the main prize ball signal output control timer area. The signal output control timer initial value is saved (step S835). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is determined by the time between the on state (for example, high level) of the main prize ball signal (for example, 128 ms) and the time of the off state (for example, low level) (for example, 64 ms). Of the ON state (for example, 128 msec). Thereafter, the ON data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S837), and the main prize ball signal editing process ends.
If the main award ball signal output count is “0” (step S833; Y), off data for turning off the main award ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process ends.

  On the other hand, if the value of the main award ball signal output control timer is not “0” (step S832; N), it is determined whether the main award ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step S836). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not “0”. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on interval (step S836; Y), the process proceeds to step S837. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (step S836; N), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process ends.

In the present embodiment, a main prize ball signal is output from the game control device 100 each time the scheduled number of game balls to be paid becomes ten, and the number of game balls paid out from the payout control device 200 becomes ten. The main prize ball signal is output every time.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the number of times of output of the main prize ball number signal by +1 (a subroutine in the payout command transmission process) every ten payout schedules (each time a payout command is transmitted), and updates ( The main prize ball signal is output for the set number of times of output.
In response to the main prize ball signal output for each schedule, the prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 payouts are actually made, so that the plan and the result can be matched. It can respond to improper payment. Also, even if a prize is won during the jackpot, the payout is delayed due to lack of a ball or the like, and even if the payout is made after the end of the big hit, the hall con (hole computer) can be accurately determined by the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning. Information can be collected (determined).

(Start port signal editing process)
Next, the details of the starting port signal editing process (step S778) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. The starting port signal editing process is a process that is performed in common for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 93, in the opening signal editing process, first, unless the starting signal output control timer is “0”, −1 is updated (step S841). Note that the minimum value of the starting port signal output control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the start port signal output control timer is “0” (step S842). If the value of the starting port signal output control timer is “0” (step S842; Y), it is determined whether the number of starting port signal outputs is “0” (step S843).

If the starting port signal output count is not “0” (step S843; N), the starting port signal output count is updated by −1 (step S844), and the starting port signal output control timer is set in the starting port signal output control timer area. The initial value is saved (step S845). The initial value of the start-up port signal output control timer is determined based on the on-state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off-state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the start-up signal. This is the ON state time (for example, 128 msec). Thereafter, the ON data for turning on the start-up port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S847), and the start-up port signal editing process ends.
If the start port signal output count is “0” (step S843; Y), off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S843). S848), ends the start-up signal editing process.

  On the other hand, when the value of the starting port signal output control timer is not “0” (Step S842; N), it is determined whether or not the starting port signal output control timer is in the output ON section (Step S846). Note that the start port signal output control timer being in the output ON period means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is not “0”. If the start port signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step S846; Y), the process proceeds to step S847. If the start port signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (step S846; N), off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( (Step S848) The start port signal editing process ends.

  Next, control executed by the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 will be described. The control process by the main control microcomputer 311 mainly includes a main process shown in FIG. 89 and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
In the main process, as shown in FIG. 94, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of the program, first, the interrupt is prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and interruption is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, a loop process is performed as a main loop process. In this loop processing, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8).
Next, an effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on an operation of the effect operation unit 550 (the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29) is performed. The input from the effect operation unit 550 is read in a timer interrupt process. In the effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect operation unit 550, a process of changing the effect contents is performed.

Next, a hall / player setting mode process for setting the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal, and for accepting operations by the player to change the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal and the setting for enabling the effect. (Step C10).
Next, a random number updating process (step C11) for updating random numbers for determining details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.
Next, a reception command check process (Step C12) for analyzing and responding to a command from the game control device 100 to perform a customer waiting demonstration editing process (Step C13) for controlling a customer waiting demonstration effect, An effect point control process (step C14) for performing a process related to a point is performed.

  Next, an effect display editing process (step C15) for performing settings for controlling the progress of the effect and editing the drawing command is performed, and the preparation end of the drawing command is set (step C16). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the contents to be drawn, and the processing is performed until the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (about 33.3 ms) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem. The generation of the ambiguous screen (described later) is performed in the effect display editing process (step C15).

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C17). In the present embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1/30 second for one frame), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is input twice. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the image update (frame switching) may be performed in 1/60 second, or the image updating (frame switching) may be performed later than 1/60 second. Switching). If it is determined in step C20 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C17; N), the process of step C17 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C17 that the current time is the frame switching timing (step C17; Y), an instruction to draw a screen is issued (step C18).

  Thereafter, a sound control process (step C19) for controlling the output of the sound from the speakers (the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process (step C19) for controlling the LEDs of the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the like. C20), a movable body control process for controlling the motor and the solenoid of the board effect device 44 (step C21), and the process returns to the process for clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Hall / player setting mode processing]
FIG. 95 shows the hall / player setting mode process (step C10) in the main process described above. In the hall / player setting mode process, first, it is determined whether or not a hall setting mode in which information is set on the game store side (step C51). In the case of the hall setting mode, the hall setting mode flag is set, and it is possible to determine whether the vehicle is in the hole setting mode based on the presence or absence of this flag.
If it is determined that the hall setting mode is being performed (step C51; Y), the process proceeds to step C56.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is not in the hall setting mode (step C51; N), it is determined whether the game is in the player setting mode in which the player sets information (step C52). Note that when in the player setting mode, the player setting mode flag is set, and it is possible to determine whether or not the player is in the player setting mode based on the presence / absence of this flag.

When it is determined that the game is in the player setting mode (Step C52; Y), the process proceeds to Step C70.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is not in the player setting mode (step C52; N), it is determined whether the start condition of the hall setting mode is satisfied (step C53). Here, the start condition of the hall setting mode is, for example, that the effect operation unit 550 is pressed twice in a customer waiting state and with the front frame 12 opened.
When it is determined that the start condition of the hole setting mode is satisfied (step C53; Y), the start of screen drawing in the hole setting mode is set (step C54), and the hall setting mode flag is set (step C55). Then, the process shifts to the process of Step C56.

In Step C56, a hall sound volume adjustment process (Step C56) for setting a changeable range of the sound volume based on the operation input is performed.
Next, hall LED brightness adjustment processing (step C57) for setting a changeable range of LED brightness based on an operation input is performed.
In these processes, both the upper limit and the lower limit may be set, or only one of them may be set. Within the range set here, the player can adjust the volume and the brightness of the LED.

Next, a liquid crystal brightness adjustment process for setting the liquid crystal brightness based on the operation input (step C58), and setting whether or not to shift to the power saving state when the game is not performed for a predetermined time based on the operation input. A setting process (step C59) and a logo color setting process (step C60) for setting the display color of the frame decoration device 18 such as a logo provided outside the frame protrusion or the like based on an operation input are performed. In the power saving setting process (step C59), a setting is made as to whether to enable the power saving setting when the game has not been performed for a predetermined time. It should be noted that the volume, the LED brightness, and the liquid crystal brightness at the time of setting the power saving may be set for each hall and each game machine in addition to whether or not to shift to the power saving state. Further, in addition to the above setting, it may be possible to set whether to operate the movable accessory during power saving.
Next, it is determined whether or not there has been a setting confirmation operation input for confirming the information set in these processes (step C61).

If it is determined that there is no setting confirmation operation input (step C61; N), the hall / player setting mode process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting confirmation operation input has been made (step C61; Y), it is determined whether the setting operation input was the factory setting (step C62). The determination operation input includes a determination operation input for determining the information set in the processing of steps C56 to C60 and a determination operation input for returning to the factory default settings, and it is determined which has been performed.

If it is determined that the input is not a finalizing operation input at the time of factory shipment (step C62; N), that is, if it is a finalizing operation input for finalizing the information set in the processing of steps C56 to C60, the operation proceeds from step C56. The determined hole setting data is written to the backup RAM using the information set in the processing up to C60 as the determined information (step C64).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the input is a finalizing operation input in the factory setting (step C62; Y), the factory setting processing (step C63) is performed, and the information set in the processing in steps C56 to C60 is performed. Is discarded and the factory default value is used as the determined information, and the determined hole setting data is written to the backup RAM (step C64). As a result, the initial setting values (setting values such as volume, LED brightness, and liquid crystal brightness) stored in the PROM 321 are stored in the FeRAM 323.
Next, the end of the screen drawing in the hall setting mode is set (step C65), the flag in the hall setting mode is cleared (step C66), and the hall / player setting mode process ends.

If it is determined that the start condition of the hole setting mode is not satisfied (step C53; N), it is determined whether the start condition of the player setting mode is satisfied (step C67). Here, the start condition of the player setting mode is, for example, that the effect operation unit 550 is pressed once in a customer waiting state in which the special figure change display game or the ordinary figure change display game is not executed. .
If it is determined that the start condition of the player setting mode is not satisfied (step C67; N), the hall / player setting mode process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the start condition of the player setting mode is satisfied (step C67; Y), the start of screen drawing in the player setting mode is set (step C68), and the player setting mode flag is set. (Step C69).

Next, a player volume adjustment process (step C70) that changes the volume based on an operation input within the changeable range set in the hall volume adjustment process (step C56), and a change set in the hall LED adjustment process (step C57) A player LED brightness adjustment process (step C71) for changing the brightness of the LEDs based on the operation input within the possible range is performed. Next, effect customization processing (step C72) for changing the effect content based on the operation input is performed. Thereafter, it is determined whether there is a setting confirmation operation input (step C73).
If it is determined that there is no setting confirmation operation input (step C73: N), the hall / player setting mode process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting confirmation operation input has been made (step C73: Y), the information set in the processing of steps C70, C71 and C72 is stored as the player setting data in the RAM 322, and then the player setting mode is set. Is set (step C74), the flag in the player setting mode is cleared (step C75), and the hall / player setting mode process ends. As a result, the brightness, volume, and effect contents of the LED set by the player are changed.

Further, since the player setting data may be erased, the data is stored in the RAM 322 instead of being written in the backup RAM (FeRAM 323), but may be stored in the FeRAM 323.
Further, the time is acquired from the RTC 338 when the power is turned off and stored in the FeRAM 322, and the power-off time is calculated from the time obtained from the RTC 338 when the power is turned on. May be determined whether or not to store the hole set value data. For example, if the power cutoff time is within a predetermined time, the hole setting value data is not stored in the player setting data and is kept as it is, and the power is cut off for a short time power failure or error recovery, etc. Then, it is possible to prevent the player setting data from being reset.

[Receive command check processing]
FIG. 96 shows the received command check processing (step C12) in the above-described main processing. In this reception command check processing, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (step C101), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C102). When it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C102; N), the received command check processing ends. When it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (Step C102; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (Step C103).

  Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C104), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C105), and whether or not copying of the commands for the number of received commands is completed. Is determined (step C106). As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer, but the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (the RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. It is configured as follows. Thus, in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command, the command (data) can be moved to make a space. In addition, the analysis of the command can be collectively performed in one round of the main processing.

  If it is determined in step C106 that command copying for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C106; N), the process returns to step C104. If it is determined that copying of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (Step C106; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (Step C107), and the received command analysis processing (Step C108) is performed.

  Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C109), and it is determined whether the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C110). If it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C110; N), the process returns to step C107. If it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C110; Y), the received command check processing ends. As described above, in the received command check processing, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are analyzed collectively. In this embodiment, the configuration is such that up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 97 shows the received command analysis processing (step C108) in the above-mentioned received command check processing. In the received command analysis processing, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C111), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C112, step C113). ). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C112; Y, step C113; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C114).

  Further, when it is determined in step C112 and step C113 that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C112; N, step C113; N), or when it is determined in step C114 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination ( In step C114; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

  If it is determined in step C114 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C114; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C115). The fluctuation command is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure. If the MODE is determined to be within the range of the variation command (step C115; Y), the variation command processing (step C116) is performed, the continuity counter is updated by +1 (step C117), and the reception command is received. The analysis processing ends.

  The continuation number counter is a counter that counts the number of times the special figure change display game continues without waiting for the customer. The value of this counter is displayed on the display device 41. It should be noted that each time the number of consecutive times reaches a predetermined value (for example, a multiple of 10), a display that emphasizes this may be performed. In addition, the maximum number of consecutive times, which is the number of times the special figure change display game is consecutively stored without waiting for a customer in the gaming machine, can be stored, and when the maximum number of consecutive times is updated, a display that emphasizes the fact is displayed. May be performed. In the customer waiting state, the immediately preceding continuous number or the maximum continuous number may be displayed so that the player can refer to when selecting a gaming machine.

  If it is determined in step C115 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C115; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the big hit command (step C118). The big hit command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit middle production (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, a long opening effect, and the like). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the big hit command (step C118; Y), the big hit command processing (step C119) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

  When it is determined in step C118 that MODE is not within the range of the jackpot-related command (step C118; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol-related command (step C120). The symbol-related command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special figure (for example, what the stop symbol of the special figure is). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbol command (step C120; Y), the symbol command processing (step C121) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

  When it is determined in step C120 that MODE is not in the range of the symbol-type command (step C120; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of single-commands such as the number-of-suspended command and the error command. (Step C122). The single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands. The one-shot commands include a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model designation command, a PB command, and the like. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single command (step C122; Y), the single command processing (step C123) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step C122 that MODE is not in the range of the single-shot command (step C122; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the pre-reading symbol command (step C124). If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the pre-reading symbol-related command (step C124; Y), the pre-reading symbol-related command processing (step C125) is performed, and the received command analyzing process ends.

  If it is determined in step C124 that MODE is not in the range of the prefetching pattern command (step C124; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the prefetch variable command (step C126). If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variable command (step C126; Y), the prefetch variable command processing (step C127) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends. If it is determined in step C126 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variable command (step C126; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

[Big hit command processing]
FIG. 98 shows the big hit command processing (step C119) in the received command analysis processing described above. In the big hit command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE is a fanfare (step C141). If it is determined that MODE is a fanfare (fanfare command) (step C141; Y), a fanfare effect setting process for setting an effect in the fanfare is performed (step C142), and the big hit command process ends. When it is determined that MODE is not a fanfare (step C141; N), it is determined whether MODE is a round (step C143).

  If the MODE is determined to be a round (round command) (step C143; Y), it is determined whether the mode is a short open (lower short open or upper short open) other than the specific round (here, 1R) (step C143). C144). If it is a short release other than the specific round (step C144; Y), the process proceeds to step C148, and the effect during the round is set. That is, in a short release other than the specific round (lower short release or upper short release), the production of the short release is started as the production during the round with the reception of the round command.

  If it is not a short release other than the specific round (step C144; N), that is, if it is an upper long release, a lower V release, a lower long release, or a lower short release in a specific round, the round command information is saved ( Step C145), and terminates the big hit command processing. In the process of storing the round command information (step C145), the round command itself may be stored, or information converted into information such as the number of rounds may be stored. In this case, the effect setting during the round is not performed here. When it is determined that MODE is not a round (step C143; N), it is determined whether MODE is long open (step C146).

  When it is determined that MODE is a long release (long release command) (step C146; Y), round command information is read (step C147), and a round effect setting process for setting an effect during a round is performed (step C148). ), A bonus item position confirmation process is performed (step C149), and the big hit command processing is terminated. That is, in the case of the upper long release, the lower V release, the lower long release, and the lower short release in a specific round, the effect of the long release is started as the effect during the round with the reception of the long release command. . When it is determined that MODE is not a long release (step C146; N), it is determined whether MODE is an interval (step C150).

  When it is determined that MODE is an interval (interval command) (step C150; Y), an interval effect setting process for setting an effect during the interval is performed (step C151), and the big hit command process ends. If it is determined that MODE is not an interval (step C150; N), it is determined whether MODE is ending (step C152).

  If the MODE is determined to be an ending (ending command) (step C152; Y), an ending effect setting process for setting an ending effect is performed (step C153), and the big hit command process ends. If it is determined that MODE is not the ending (step C152; N), the big hit command processing is ended.

  As described above, by starting the long opening effect based on the reception of the long opening command, even when the execution mode of the special game state is changed in the development process of the gaming machine, the long opening operation is performed by the effect control device 300. It is not necessary to change the setting of the timing to start the production. In addition, although the execution mode of the special game state is often different in the same model series, the measures for making the setting of the timing for starting the long opening effect in the effect control device 300 different for each model are not performed. And the common program can be used as it is. It should be noted that there is often a long opening and a short opening as a mode of executing a round in a special game state even in a so-called wing-type gaming machine, but even in such a gaming machine, a long opening command is issued only in the case of a long opening. 300, and the effect control device 300 can start the long opening effect in response to the reception of the long opening command.

  In FIG. 99, the upper row shows the execution mode of the special game state of the probable big hit (12R probable change, 5R probable change, 4R probable change), and the lower row shows the special game when the normal big hit (5R normal, 4R normal) is 5R normal. The state of execution of the state is shown. Also, the middle row shows the execution mode of the effect common to both special game states.

  When the result of the special figure change display game becomes a big hit and the stop time for displaying the result ends, a special game state is started (t151). At this time, the game control device 100 transmits a fanfare command to the effect control device 300. With the start of the special game state, the fanfare time (t151 to t152) is reached, and when the fanfare time ends, the first round is started (t152). At this time, the game control device 100 transmits a round command corresponding to the first round to the effect control device 300. In the case of the probability change big hit, since the first round is open to the lower V, the first special variable winning device 38 is first opened for a short time (t152 to t153). Thereafter, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed for a predetermined time (t153 to t154), and then the first special variable winning device 38 is opened for a long time (t154 to t155). At the start of the long-time opening, which is the second opening, the game control device 100 transmits a long opening command to the effect control device 300.

  Thereafter, when the first round is completed, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t155), and the interval time is reached (t155 to t156). At this time, the game control device 100 transmits an interval command to the effect control device 300. Then, when the interval time ends, the second round is started. The second round is an upper long open, and at the start of the land, the game control device 100 transmits a round command corresponding to the second round and a long open command to the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 starts the fanfare effect in response to the reception of the fanfare command (t151), but the fanfare effect continues until the start of the second opening in the first round (t154). Then, the effect of the long opening is started in response to the reception of the long opening command transmitted when the long opening which is the second opening is started (t154). The long opening effect is continued until the reception of the interval command (t155), and the interval effect is started with the reception of the interval command (t155). After that, the interval effect is terminated in response to the reception of the round command (t156), and the effect of the round is started. Here, since the long open command is received, the effect of the long open is started (t156).

  The case of a normal big hit is the same as the case of the probable big hit until the end of the fanfare time. In the case of a normal big hit, the first round is open to the lower short, so the first special variable winning device 38 is opened for a short time (t152 to t153) at the start of the first round, and the first round ends. Therefore, when the opening of the first special variable winning device 38 for a short time is completed, the game control device 100 transmits an interval command to the effect control device 300 (t153), and the interval time is set (t153 to t154).

  The opening of the lower short in the first round of the normal big hit constitutes the first execution mode, and the opening of the lower V in the first round in the above-mentioned probability changing big hit makes the game to a specific area (probable operation area 38h) than in the first execution mode. A second execution mode in which the inflow of the ball is easy and the execution period is longer than the first execution mode is provided.

  Then, when the interval time ends, the second round is started. In the case of the 5R normal jackpot, the second round is open upper long, and at the start of the round, the game control device 100 transmits a round command corresponding to the second round and a long open command to the effect control device 300. Thereafter, when the second round is completed, the second special variable prize winning device 39 is closed (t155), and the interval time is reached (t155 to t156). At this time, the game control device 100 transmits an interval command to the effect control device 300. Then, when the interval time ends, the third round is started. The third round is a lower long release, and at the start of the round, the game control device 100 transmits a round command and a long release command corresponding to the third round to the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 starts the fanfare effect in response to the reception of the fanfare command (t151), but the fanfare effect continues until the end of the first round (t154). Then, in response to the reception of the long release command transmitted at the start of the second round, the effect of long release is started (t154). The long opening effect is continued until the reception of the interval command (t155), and the interval effect is started with the reception of the interval command (t155). After that, the interval effect is terminated in response to the reception of the round command (t156), and the effect of the round is started. Here, since the long open command is received, the effect of the long open is started (t156).

  In other words, the operation and the performance of the special variable winning device are almost the same between the probability variable jackpot and the normal jackpot, making it difficult for the player to recognize it. Disappointment can be reduced. However, until the end of the fanfare effect, the operation and the effect of the special variable winning device are completely the same. It is also possible to distinguish them.

  In addition, even in the case of 4R normal, the behavior is the same as that of other big hits until the start of the second round. Further, as shown in FIG. 100, the second round (t154 to t155) in the normal jackpot is set to the lower long opening, and the subsequent opening is alternately opened to the upper long opening and the lower long opening, so that the special game state is achieved. Until the end, the operation and the effect of the special variable winning device have completely the same behavior, and it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish. For example, if 5R normal and 4R probable change are set, 5R normal 2R is set to lower long open, 3R is set to upper long open, 4R is set to lower long open, and 5R is set to upper long open. That is, since the normal big hit does not have a long open in a specific round, the same behavior as the probable big hit with one more round can be achieved.

  As described above, the game is controlled in the gaming machine that executes the variable display game based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. A game control means (game control device 100) and a special area (where a game ball can be converted into a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won and an open state in which a game ball can be won in a special game state, into which a game ball can flow). A special variable prize device (first special variable prize device 38) having a certain variable operation region 38h), and the game control means performs a game based on the fact that the game ball which has won the special variable prize device flows into the specific region. A game state that is more advantageous to the player than when the ball has not flowed into the specific area can be generated after the end of the special game state, and among a plurality of rounds in which the special variable winning device is opened, It is configured to determine whether the game ball that has flowed into the special variable prize winning device has flowed into the specific area in the round, and there are a plurality of types of special results, and the execution mode of the first round according to the type of the special result Selecting either a first execution mode or a second execution mode in which a game ball can easily flow into a specific area than the first execution mode and has a longer execution period than the first execution mode, In the case of the first execution mode, the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game is a predetermined predetermined executable that can be executed from the start of the special game state to the start of the second round. In the case of the second execution mode, after the fanfare effect is executed, the effect corresponding to the first round is executed. Therefore, a period during which it is difficult to flow into the specific area due to the fanfare effect can be made inconspicuous, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 101, the fanfare time can be made different between the case of the probable big hit (t161 to t162) and the case of the normal big hit (t161 to t163) so that the probable variable big hit and the normal big hit can be distinguished. Is also good. That is, in both the first execution mode and the second execution mode, the game control means (game control device 100) controls the special variable prize winning device (the first control mode) over a predetermined opening time during a period in which a predetermined fanfare effect is performed. The special variable prize winning device 38) is configured to be opened, and the opening of the special variable prize winning device during the period in which the predetermined fanfare effect is executed has the same opening time in both the first execution mode and the second execution mode. The time from the start of the special game state to the start of opening may be different between the first execution mode and the second execution mode. Thereby, it is possible for a player who continues to play the gaming machine to determine whether or not it is difficult to flow into the specific area, and whether or not it is difficult to flow into the specific area. It is possible to give interest to discriminating whether or not to determine whether or not the interest of the game is reduced.

[Single command processing]
FIG. 102 shows the one-shot command processing (step C123) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this single command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE is for designating a model (step C171). If the MODE is determined to designate a model (step C171; Y), a model setting process (step C172) for setting the model is performed, and the single command processing is terminated. If it is determined that MODE does not specify a model (step C171; N), it is determined whether MODE is for instructing RAM initialization (step C173).

  If it is determined in step C173 that MODE is for instructing RAM initialization (step C173; Y), RAM initialization for executing processing corresponding to power-on with RAM initialization in the game control device 100 is performed. Then, the process executes the setting process (step C174), sets the customer waiting demonstration command reception flag (step C175), performs the accessory position confirmation process (step C176), and ends the single-shot command process. If it is determined that MODE does not instruct RAM initialization (Step C173; N), it is determined whether MODE instructs power outage recovery (Step C177).

  If it is determined in step C177 that MODE is a command for restoration of power failure (step C177; Y), a power failure restoration setting process (step C178) for executing a process related to restoration of power failure is performed, and a single command processing is performed. To end. When it is determined that the MODE does not command the restoration of the power failure (step C177; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the one for instructing the customer waiting demonstration (step C179).

  If it is determined in step C179 that MODE is for instructing a customer waiting demonstration (step C179; Y), it is determined whether the command is a normal customer waiting demonstration command (step C180). If it is determined that the command is not a normal customer waiting demonstration command (step C180; N), the single command processing ends. If it is determined that the command is a normal customer waiting demonstration command (step C180; Y), the customer waiting demonstration command reception flag is set (step C181), and the accessory position confirmation processing (step C182) is performed. In the accessory position confirmation processing (steps C149 and C182), it is confirmed whether or not the accessory is at the normal position, and if the accessory is not at the normal position, settings are made to return the position of the accessory to the normal position. Further, the continuous number counter, which is a counter for counting the number of times the special figure change display game is continued without entering the customer waiting state, is cleared to 0 (step C183), and the single command processing is terminated.

  As a result, the number of consecutive special figure change display games without resetting to the customer waiting state is reset to zero, and the value displayed on the display device 41 also becomes zero. Note that the value immediately before being cleared to 0 may be stored so that it can be referred to later. For example, a history of past consecutive counts may be displayed based on a player's operation. Also, the maximum number of consecutive times, which is the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game is continued without being in the customer waiting state in the gaming machine, can be stored, and the value immediately before being cleared to 0 is currently stored. If the number is larger than the value, the value immediately before being cleared to 0 may be stored as a new maximum continuous number. Further, when the maximum number of consecutive times is updated, a notification to that effect may be given. The maximum number of consecutive times may be the maximum value for each business day, or may be the maximum value during the period until the RAM is cleared. Alternatively, both of them may be stored. Further, the number of consecutive times may be cleared to 0 based on the operation of the operation means by the player.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step C179 that MODE does not instruct the customer waiting demonstration (step C179; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the special figure reservation system (step C184). If it is determined in step C184 that MODE is within the range of the special figure reservation system (step C184; Y), the special figure reservation information setting processing for storing information related to the reservation of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 or the like (Step C185) is performed, and the single command processing ends. When it is determined that MODE is not in the range of the special figure reservation system (step C184; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the probability information system (step C186).

  If it is determined in step C186 that MODE is within the range of the probability information system (step C186; Y), a probability information setting process (step C187) for executing a process such as setting an effect corresponding to the current probability state ) To end the single command processing. When it is determined that MODE is not in the range of the probability information system (Step C186; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the PB system (Step C188).

  If it is determined in step C188 that MODE is within the range of the PB system (step C188; Y), the PB information for setting the input state of the operation means based on the PB command and the display setting based on the PB input mode information command A setting process is performed (step C189), and the single command processing ends. When it is determined that MODE is not in the range of the PB system (step C188; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of error / illegal system (step C190).

  If it is determined in step C190 that MODE is within the range of error / illegal (step C190; Y), an error / illegal setting process (step C191) for executing processes such as error notification is performed, and a single shot is performed. Terminates system command processing. When it is determined that the MODE is not in the range of the error / illegal system (step C191; N), it is determined whether the MODE is for instructing a symbol stop (step C192).

  When it is determined in step C192 that MODE does not instruct the symbol stop (step C192; N), the single-shot command processing is ended. If it is determined that MODE is for commanding a symbol stop (step C192; Y), it is determined whether or not the command is a normal symbol stop command (step C193). When it is determined that the command is not a normal symbol stop command (step C193; N), the one-shot system command processing ends. The symbol stop command is divided into special figure 1 and special figure 2.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step C193 that the command is a normal symbol stop command (step C193; Y), the corresponding special figure is set to stop (step C194), and if all the symbols are stopped, the gaming state flag is set. The normal state is set (step C195), and the single command processing ends. The game state flag is a flag indicating the current game state.In addition to the normal state, the game state flag includes a flag indicating a state such as fluctuating or a big hit, and an appropriate flag is set according to the situation. You.

[PB information setting process]
Next, the details of the PB information setting processing (step C189) in the above-described one-shot command processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 103, in the PB information setting process, first, it is determined whether the command is a normal command (step C201). If the command is not a normal command (step C201; N), the PB information setting process ends. . If the received command is a normal command (step C201; Y), it is determined whether the received command is a PB on / off command (PB on command and PB off command) (step C202).

  If the received command is a PB on / off command (step C202; Y), the state of the sensor specified by the command is set to the specified state (step C203), and the effect button (effect button 25 and touch panel 29) is set. The input information is rewritten to the latest state (step C204), and the PB information setting process ends. Here, when the PB on command is received, the input state information of the operation unit by receiving the PB command is turned on, and when the PB off command is received, the input state information of the operation unit by receiving the PB command is turned off.

  The operation means includes an effect button 25 for receiving a pressing operation input from the player, and a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player. In addition, the touch panel 29 is configured to separately receive contact operation inputs for eight areas. The effect control device 300 recognizes whether or not each of the nine operation inputs has an operation input. However, when the PB on command is received, the input state information is input for all of the nine operation inputs. Is considered to be in a certain state (ON state). When a PB off command is received, the input state information for all nine operation inputs is regarded as a state in which there is no operation input (off state).

  On the other hand, if the received command is not a PB on / off command (step C202; N), it is determined whether the received command is a PB input command (PB input mode information command) (step C205). If the received command is not a PB input command (step C205; N), the PB information setting process ends. If the received command is a PB input command (step C205; Y), screen drawing setting of the input mode name corresponding to the command is performed (step C206), and the PB information setting processing ends. Here, the display setting indicating whether the automatic input mode or the manual input mode is set is performed. This display may be performed on the display device 41 or may be performed on a display LED.

[Direction button input processing]
Next, details of the effect button input processing (step C9) in the above-described main processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 104, in the effect button input processing, first, the value of the present effect button state area is copied to the previous effect button state area (step C31), and the port state of the effect button (effect button 25 or touch panel 29) is set. The data is read (step C32). Next, the input state information of the effect button by receiving the PB command is loaded (step C33), the actual input state and the input state information are combined to generate input data (step C34), and the combined input data is It is saved in the effect button state area (step C35). If either the actual input state or the input state information is in a state where an operation input is present (on state), the input data after synthesis is set to a state where an operation input is present (on state). That is, the on state is prioritized.

  Then, based on the value of the previous effect button state area, the value of the present effect button state area, and the like, the state change data of the button (the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29) is generated and saved in the effect button rising edge area (step C36). . Here, the input from the operation means (the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29) is read in, for example, a timer interrupt process with a 1 ms period, and chattering is removed to determine the state. Then, in the effect button input process of, for example, about 33.3 milliseconds, the state of the input from the operation means is confirmed to determine the input content, and a process of switching the effect according to the result is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether the touch sensor 29a is in the valid period (step C37). If the touch sensor 29a is not in the valid period (step C37; N), the process proceeds to step C42. If the touch sensor 29a is in the valid period (step C37; Y), a touch sensor control process (step C38) for determining whether or not there is an input for each of the touch sensors 29a is performed. Is determined (step C39).

  Specifically, for example, the effect control device 300 displays an image or the like prompting a contact movement operation on the operation means on the display device 41, and confirms unless a plurality of inputs such as a flick operation and a circular tracing operation are monitored. When an operation that cannot be performed is requested, when it is determined that the requested operation has been performed based on a plurality of input results, it is determined that the input content has been determined. Here, the plurality of input results are, for example, state change data of the operating means generated in each step C35 of the plurality of effect button input processes executed within a predetermined input content confirmation period. It is. In the case of the present embodiment, the effect button input processing is performed at a period of about 33.3 ms. For example, if the input content determination period is set to 333 msec, the effect button input processing is performed 10 times within the input content determination period. Is executed to generate ten state change data. Further, for example, when the effect control device 300 displays an image or the like prompting a touch operation on the operation means on the display device 41 and requests an operation that can be determined only by monitoring one input such as a touch operation, When it is determined that the requested operation has been performed based on the result of this input, it is determined that the input content has been determined.

  If it is determined in step C39 that the input content of the touch sensor 29a has not been determined (step C39; N), the process proceeds to step C42. When it is determined that the input content of the touch sensor 29a is determined (step C39; Y), it is determined whether or not the effective probability of the touch sensor 29a has been exceeded as a result of the touch sensor control processing (step C38) (step C40). ). More specifically, the effect control device 300 displays, for example, an image that prompts a plurality of contact operations (such as a continuous hit (continuous touch) operation) and a plurality of contact movement operations (such as a rubbing operation) on the operation unit. 41, the ratio of the number of times that the input content is determined to be determined in step C39 after the start of the display to the number of effect button input processes performed since the start of the display is predetermined. It is determined that the effective probability has been exceeded when the number of times that the input content has been determined in step C39 after the display ratio has reached the predetermined ratio or when the input content has been determined in step C39 after the start of the display reaches a predetermined number of times. . Further, the effect control device 300 displays, for example, an image or the like prompting one touch operation (one-touch operation or the like) on the operation means on the display device 41, or one contact movement operation (flick operation or the like) on the operation means. ) Is displayed on the display device 41, it is determined in step C39 that the input content has been determined, and thus it is determined that the effective probability has been unconditionally exceeded.

  When it is assumed that there is an operation input (ON state) based on the PB ON command, it is assumed that all nine operation inputs on the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 have an operation input. If a contact movement operation such as an operation has been requested, it is assumed that the requested operation has been performed when the state where the operation input is present for all nine operation inputs has continued for a predetermined time.

  If it is determined in step C40 that the effective probability of the touch sensor 29a has not been exceeded (step C40; N), the process proceeds to step C42. When it is determined that the effective probability of the touch sensor 29a has been exceeded (step C40; Y), the input result information of the touch sensor 29a is stored (step C41), and during the valid period of the PUSH sensor (effect button switch 25a). Is determined (step C42).

  Then, when it is determined that the push sensor is not in the valid period (step C42; N), the effect button input processing ends. When it is determined that the push sensor is in the valid period (step C42; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the push sensor (the effect button switch 25a), that is, whether a pressing operation on the operating means is detected (step C42). Step C43). When it is determined in step C43 that there is no input to the push sensor (step C43; N), the effect button input processing ends. Further, when it is determined that there is an input to the push sensor (step C43; Y), that is, when a pressing operation on the operating means is detected, it is determined whether or not the effective probability of the push sensor (production button switch 25a) has been exceeded. (Step C44).

  Specifically, for example, when the effect control device 300 displays an image or the like prompting a plurality of pressing operations (such as a continuous hit (continuous PUSH) operation) on the operating means on the display device 41, the effect control device 300 starts after the start of the display. When the ratio of the number of times that the input has been determined in step C43 after the start of the display to the number of the effect button input processes executed reaches the predetermined ratio, or after the start of the display, When the number of times that it is determined in step C43 that there is an input reaches a predetermined number of times, it is determined that the effective probability has been exceeded. Further, for example, when displaying an image or the like prompting one pressing operation (one push operation or the like) on the operation means on display device 41, effect control device 300 has determined that there is an input in step C43. It is determined that the effective probability has been unconditionally exceeded.

  If it is determined in step C44 that the effective probability of the PUSH sensor has not been exceeded (step C44; N), the effect button input processing ends. When it is determined that the effective probability of the push sensor has been exceeded (step C44; Y), the input result information of the push sensor (effect button switch 25a) is stored (step C45), and the effect button input processing ends. By the above-described effect button input processing, the input result information of the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is stored, and if the input result information matches the operation requested in the effect being executed, the effect contents are changed based on this. Is performed.

  FIG. 105 (a) shows the actual input state by operating the operation means (the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29) when the input state information due to the reception of the PB command is always off, and the recognition state in the effect control device 300. (Input data after synthesis) is shown. The case where the input state information is always in the OFF state due to the reception of the PB command is the state in the manual input mode or the customer waiting state. The operation means includes an effect button 25 for receiving a pressing operation input from the player, and a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player. In addition, the touch panel 29 is configured to separately receive contact operation inputs for eight areas. The effect control device 300 recognizes whether or not each of these nine operation inputs has an operation input. In FIG. 105 (a), one of the nine operation inputs will be described, but the same processing is performed for the other eight operation inputs.

  In a state where there is no operation input by the operation means (off state), the effect control device 300 also recognizes that the operation is off. Then, when the operation input is started and the operation input is in a state (ON state), the recognition status in the effect control device 300 is changed to ON (t121). In a state in which the ON state of the operation means is continued, the state recognized as being ON by the effect control device 300 also continues (t121 to t122). Thereafter, when the operation input ends and there is no operation input (off state), the recognition state of the effect control device 300 is changed to off (t122). In the state where the OFF state of the operation means is continued, the state in which the effect is recognized as being OFF by the effect control device 300 also continues (t122 to t123). As described above, the recognition state in the effect control device 300 is linked to the presence or absence of the operation input by the operation means (actual input state). In addition, it can be said that if any of the input state information and the actual input state by receiving the PB command is on, it is recognized as on.

  FIG. 105 (b) shows the recognition state of the effect control device 300 when the actual input state by the operation input by the operation means and the input state information by the reception of the PB command are in the on state (the state after the synthesis). Input data). The case where the input state information is turned on due to the reception of the PB command is the state of the automatic input mode.

  In a state where there is no operation input with the operation means (OFF state), when the PB ON command is received, the recognition state in the effect control device 300 is changed to ON (t131). Then, until the next PB-off command is received, the effect control device 300 continues the state of being recognized as being on (t131 to t132). Thereafter, when the PB off command is received, the recognition status in the effect control device 300 is changed to off (t132). In a state where there is no operation input with the operation means (off state), the state in which the effect control device 300 recognizes that the PB off command is off from the reception of the PB off command until the reception of the next PB on command is continued. It is supposed to.

  Here, the PB-off command is received in a state where there is no operation input by the operation unit (off state) (t132), and the operation input is started by the operation unit before the reception of the next PB-on command (t134) and the operation is started. There is an input (ON state) (t133). With the start of the operation input by the operation means, the recognition status in the effect control device 300 is turned on. In the state where the ON state of the operation means is continued, even if the PB off command is received (t135), the state that the effect control device 300 also recognizes the ON state continues (t133 to t137).

  Then, when the operation input ends and there is no operation input (OFF state) (t137), the recognition state in the effect control device 300 becomes a recognition state corresponding to the PB command. Here, since the PB command received immediately before is the PB on command (t136), the state in which effect control device 300 recognizes that the PB command is on continues until the next PB off command is received (t138).

  In this way, it is possible to generate a state recognized as being on by the effect control device 300 (a state with an operation input) based on both the actual input information by the operation input with the operation means and the input state information by the input of the PB command. Have been. Thereby, in the auto input mode, the effect proceeds as if the player did not operate the operation means, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, it is possible to show a change in the effect even to a player who feels that the operation of the operation means is troublesome, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, even if a malfunction occurs in the operation means, it is possible to show a change in the effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, even during a period in which it is considered that there is no operation input (off state) based on the input state information by the input of the PB command, if the actual input information by the operation input by the operation means is turned on, this is given priority and the effect control device is given. At 300, the state is recognized as ON (state with operation input). Thus, the intention of the player is reflected even in the automatic input mode. In addition, since the mode can be switched between the automatic input mode and the manual input mode, the setting can be made according to the preference of the player.

  From the above, the game is controlled in the gaming machine that executes the variable display game based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. Game control means (game control device 100), effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect under the control of the game control means, and an operation signal which is operable by the player and which controls an operation signal based on the operation. Operation means (effect button 25, touch panel 29) for outputting to the means, the game control means can transmit a pseudo operation command to the effect control means, and the effect control means is based on the operation of the operation means The effect can be changed by recognizing that the operation means has been operated based on the input operation signal, and the performance can be considered as if the operation means has been operated based on the pseudo operation command. And thus it is possible to vary the. Therefore, it is also possible to change the effect by a pseudo operation command different from the operation of the operation means, and it is possible to perform an unprecedented effect in the effect requiring the operation of the operation means, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

  In addition, even when it is considered that the operation means is not operated based on the pseudo operation command, the effect control means performs the effect according to the input of the operation signal when the operation signal is input. It can be changed. Therefore, the intention of the player who has operated the operation means is given priority.

  Further, a detection area (PB input mode switching gate switch 96a) which has a game area 32 in which the game ball can flow down, detects the passage of the game ball in the game area 32, and outputs a detection signal based on the passage to the game control means. The game control means includes, for each input of the detection signal, a state capable of generating a state in which the operation means is deemed to have been operated by the pseudo operation instruction to the effect control means, and a state in which the operation means is operated by the pseudo operation instruction. The state is switched between a state in which the state regarded as being performed and a state in which the state is not generated are switched. Therefore, the player can select whether or not to generate a state in which the operation means is considered to have been operated by the pseudo operation command.

  In addition, the pseudo operation command includes a start command instructing that the operation of the operating means is to be started and an end command instructing that the operation of the operating means is to be ended. Is regarded as a state in which the operation means is operated, and a period from the reception of the end command to the reception of the start instruction is regarded as a state in which the operation means is not operated. Therefore, the period in which the operation unit is regarded as being operated and the period in which the operation unit is regarded as not being operated are intermittently and alternately continued, so that the same state as when the operation unit is operated a plurality of times is performed. Can be generated, and it is possible to cope with an effect requiring a plurality of operations of the operation means.

  In the effect control device 300, if there is a function that is regarded as a continuous tapping operation when the state in which the operating means is operated is continued, the PB on command is issued in the auto input mode with the start of the special figure change display game. May be transmitted, and only the PB off command may be transmitted at the end of the special figure change display game.

  In addition, the effect that the effect control device 300 recognizes as ON (the state with operation input) is generated by the PB command, but the effect control device 300 does not generate the state recognized as ON (the state with operation input). In both cases, when the operation of the operation means is requested in the effect in the automatic input mode, it is sufficient that the requested operation can be regarded as being executed. For example, the game control device 100 transmits a PB on command when the auto input mode is started, and transmits a PB off command when the auto input mode is released. During the period from the reception of the PB off command to the reception of the PB off command, if the operation of the operation means is requested in the effect, the processing may be performed such that the requested operation is regarded as being executed.

  In addition, the game control device 100 switches between the automatic input mode and the manual input mode, and in the automatic input mode, the pseudo operation command is transmitted. The processing in the input mode may be performed. In this case, the input information from the PB gate switch is input to the effect control device 300 so that the effect control device 300 switches between the automatic input mode and the manual input mode. Further, in the automatic input mode, the same processing as in the case of receiving the pseudo operation instruction is performed, and it is assumed that the operation has been performed. Note that the operation mode may be switched between the automatic input mode and the manual input mode.

  Further, in an effect requiring operation of the operating means, a case may be provided in which the effect does not change when there is no operation of the operating means even in the automatic input mode, or even in the manual input mode. A case may be provided in which the effect changes in the same manner as when the operation means is operated without any operation.

  Further, as described above, it can be regarded that the operation means (the effect button 25, the touch panel 29) has been operated by the pseudo operation command (PB command) from the game control device 100. Even if the game board 30 is not attached to the front frame 12 provided with the operation means in maintenance or the like, it is possible to confirm the change in the effect based on the operation of the operation means only with the game board 30, and to perform development, manufacturing, maintenance and the like. Efficiency can be increased.

  When performing development, manufacturing, or maintenance, the auto input mode may be set by operating the PB gate switch. In the case of using the gaming control device 100 in which software dedicated to the test mode for performing the inspection of the gaming machine in the development, manufacturing, and maintenance of the gaming machine is used, the input from the PB gate switch is set to the automatic input mode and the manual mode. Instead of or in addition to switching between the input modes, the test mode may be set based on performing a specific operation, and the test mode may be set to the auto input mode. The automatic input mode may be set only in the test mode. Further, the PB gate switch may be used for other purposes related to inspection. In addition, if the game control device 100 in which the software dedicated to the test mode for inspecting the game machine is mounted and the test mode is set to the auto input mode, even if the game machine does not have the PB gate changeover switch, the pseudo operation can be performed. Inspection by command can be performed.

  The effect control device 300 is equipped with software dedicated to the test mode, and is set to the test mode when a command instructing the start of the test mode is received from the game control device 100. In the test mode, the automatic input is performed. The mode may be set. In addition, the test mode may be entered when a specific operation is performed or when a command instructing the start of the test mode is received from another device other than the game control device 100. Alternatively, the PB command may be valid only in the test mode, and the effect may be changed based on the PB command assuming that the operation unit has been operated.

  The test mode is a mode for inspecting each function of the gaming machine during development, manufacturing, maintenance and the like of the gaming machine. For example, when the test mode is set in the game control device 100, information to that effect is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the test mode is also set in the effect control device 300. In addition to the above test, the function test of the effect control device 300 can be executed. In this test mode, a test is also performed to determine whether the processing based on the operation of the operation unit is appropriately performed. Since the operation means is provided on the main body frame 12, conventionally, it is impossible to execute a test on whether the processing based on the operation of the operation means is properly performed unless the game board 30 is attached to the main body frame 12. However, by transmitting the pseudo operation command as described above, a test can be performed even on the game board 30 alone, and the efficiency of the inspection can be improved. In addition, the function of the test mode for the inspection may be such that only the pseudo operation command is output, and the other functions may perform the same operation as in the case of playing the game.

  That is, in a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state advantageous to a player when the result of the variable display game is a special result, an effect control unit that controls an effect. (Effect control device 300), and operation means (effect button 25, touch panel 29) operable by the player and outputting an operation signal based on the operation to the effect control means. It is possible to change the effect by recognizing that the operating means has been operated based on the operation signal input based on the operation of the operation, and assume that the operating means has been operated based on the pseudo operation command received from the outside, and perform the effect. It may be possible to change it. With this configuration, the effect can be changed by a pseudo operation command different from the operation of the operation unit, and the efficiency of the inspection related to the operation of the operation unit can be improved.

  Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is configured to start the test mode based on input of information for instructing the start of the test mode dedicated to the inspection. The effect may be changed based on the assumption that the operation means has been operated based on the operation. In this way, the pseudo operation command can be validated when the inspection is performed.

  Next, the connection structure of the cables on the back side of the gaming machine will be described. 106 and 107 show the back side of the gaming machine 10. Various control devices and devices are arranged on the back side of the gaming machine, and these control devices and devices are connected to each other by a cable so that control information can be transmitted and received. The connection of the cable is performed by connecting a cable-side connector provided at an end of the cable and a board-side connector provided on a board of a control device or an apparatus. However, a game machine has a plurality of connectors, and the operation of correctly connecting cables to the plurality of connectors in the manufacture and maintenance of the game machine is complicated. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the connection position and the connection direction can be easily understood by attaching the discrimination information to the board side connector and the cable. As the discrimination information, any information can be used as long as it can be distinguished from the code located at the other end, such as adding a color, a pattern, and a character, or providing unevenness or a difference in diameter.

  Here, the board-side connectors provided on the back sides of the first control device 600 and the second control device 650, which are control boards arranged on the back surface of the game board 30, will be described. Of course, the configuration described here is also applicable to other control devices and devices provided on the game board 30 and the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10. Further, the present invention can be applied to peripheral devices of the gaming machine 10 such as a ball rental machine.

  A plurality of board-side connectors 601 to 609 are provided on the back surface of the first control device 600 arranged substantially at the center of the back surface of the gaming machine. FIG. 108 shows a state in which a cable is connected to board-side connectors 601 to 609 in first control device 600.

  The board side connector 601 is a connector in which pins serving as contact points are arranged in the left-right direction and arranged in two rows vertically. The cable 611 connected here has a cable-side connector 611a that can be connected to the board-side connector 601 and can be connected by inserting the cable-side connector 611a into the board-side connector 601. The board-side connector 602 is also a connector in which pins serving as contacts are arranged along the left-right direction and arranged in two rows vertically, and can be connected by inserting the cable-side connector 612a of the cable 612 into the board-side connector 602. It has become.

  The board-side connectors 601 and 602 have the same shape, but different discrimination information is attached to the board-side connectors 601 and 602, respectively. Here, it is indicated by a thick oblique line and a thin oblique line, but is, for example, a color. In the drawing, other connectors and cables are also indicated by patterns such as diagonal lines and hatching as discrimination information, but different patterns indicate different colors. Of course, the discrimination information may be constituted by the patterns as shown in the figure.

  The codes 611b and 612b located at one end of the cables 611 and 612 connected to the respective board-side connectors 601 and 602 in the alignment direction of the codes are the same as the discrimination information attached to the board-side connectors to be connected. Is attached. Thus, the connection destination can be easily determined. Further, the board side connectors 601 and 602 are arranged such that the codes 611b and 612b to which the discrimination information is attached are located in the same direction (here, right side), whereby the connection direction of the cable side connectors 611 and 612 is established. Can be easily determined.

  The board side connector 603 is a connector in which pins serving as contact points are arranged in a line in the left-right direction. The cable 613 connected here has a cable-side connector 613a that can be connected to the board-side connector 603, and can be connected by inserting the cable-side connector 613a into the board-side connector 603. The board-side connector 604 is also a connector in which pins serving as contacts are arranged in a line in the left-right direction.

  The board-side connectors 603 and 604 have the same shape, but different discrimination information is attached to the board-side connectors 603 and 604, respectively. The codes 613b, 614b located at one end of the cables 613, 614 connected to the respective board-side connectors 603, 604 in the code alignment direction have the same discrimination information attached to the board-side connectors to be connected. Is attached. Thus, the connection destination can be easily determined. Further, the board side connectors 603 and 604 are arranged such that the codes 613b and 614b to which the discrimination information is attached are located in the same direction (here, left side), whereby the connection direction of the cable side connectors 613 and 614 is established. Can be easily determined.

  The board-side connector 605 is a connector in which pins serving as contact points are arranged in a line in the left-right direction. The board connectors 603 and 604 also have pins arranged in a line, but have a different number of pins from the board connector 605. The cable 615 connected here has a cable-side connector 615a that can be connected to the board-side connector 605, and can be connected by inserting the cable-side connector 615a into the board-side connector 605. The board-side connectors 606, 607, and 608 are also connectors in which pins serving as contact points are arranged in a line in the left-right direction, and these board-side connectors 606, 607, and 608 are respectively connected to the cable-side connectors of the cables 616, 617, and 618. 616a, 617a, 618a can be connected by inserting.

  Although the board-side connectors 605 to 608 are connectors having the same shape, different identification information is attached to the board-side connectors 605 to 608, respectively. The cords 615b, 616b, 617b, and 618b located at one end of the cables 615 to 618 connected to the board-side connectors 605 to 608 in the cord alignment direction are attached to the board-side connectors to be connected. The same discrimination information as the discrimination information is attached. Thus, the connection destination can be easily determined. Further, the board side connectors 605 to 608 are arranged such that the codes 615b, 616b, 617b, and 618b to which the discrimination information is added are located in the same direction (here, the left side). The connection direction 618 can be easily determined.

  The board-side connector 609 is a connector in which pins serving as contact points are arranged in a line in the vertical direction. The number of pins and the pin arrangement of the board-side connector 609 are the same as those of the board-side connectors 603 and 604. The cable 668 connected to the board-side connector 609 has a cable-side connector 668a connectable to the board-side connector 609, and can be connected by inserting the cable-side connector 668a into the board-side connector 609. The board-side connector 609 is provided with discrimination information different from those of the board-side connectors 603 and 604 having the same pin number and pin arrangement. The code 668b located at one end of the cable 668 connected to the board-side connector 609 in the direction in which the cords are aligned has the same discrimination information as the discrimination information given to the board-side connector 609.

  Here, the direction in which the codes 611b and 612b to which the discrimination information is attached is located in the board side connectors 601 and 602 having two rows of contact pins and the discrimination information in the board side connectors 603 to 608 where the contact pins are arranged in one row. The directions in which the codes 613b to 618b marked with are located are different. Thereby, the connection direction of the board-side connector can be grasped by the pin arrangement of the board-side connector to be connected.

  Note that the discrimination information given to the board-side connectors 601 to 609 is such that the same discrimination information is not obtained between board-side connectors having the same pin number and pin arrangement, but the pin number and the pin arrangement are different. Some of the board side connectors may have the same discrimination information. Of course, the same determination information may not be obtained. Also, when there is a board-side connector in which three or more rows of pins are arranged, the codes provided with the identification information are arranged on the same side between the board-side connectors of the same number of rows. Further, in the board-side connector and the code, the discrimination information is attached to the entire board-side connector and the code, but may be attached to a part of the board-side connector and the code. Further, the discrimination information only needs to be attached so that the code located at one end in the alignment direction of the code and the code located at the other end can be distinguished. Codes other than the above may or may not have discrimination information. If one of the codes located at the end can be distinguished from the other, discrimination information may be added to both.

  A plurality of board-side connectors 651 to 659 are provided on the back surface of the second control device 650 disposed on the open end side (left side when viewed from the back side) of the front frame 12 on the back side of the gaming machine 10. FIG. 109 shows a state in which a cable is connected to board-side connectors 651 to 659 in second control device 650.

  The board side connector 651 is a connector in which pins serving as contact points are arranged in a line in the left-right direction. The cable 661 connected here has a cable-side connector 661a connectable to the board-side connector 651, and can be connected by inserting the cable-side connector 661a into the board-side connector 651. Also, the board side connectors 652 to 656 have the same pin number and pin arrangement, and can be connected by inserting the cable side connectors 662a to 666a of the cables 662 to 666 into the board side connectors 652 to 656, respectively. I have.

  The board-side connectors 651 to 656 are connectors having the same shape, but different discrimination information is attached to the board-side connectors 651 to 656, respectively. The codes 661b to 666b located at one end of the cables 661 to 666 connected to the respective board-side connectors 651 to 656 in the code alignment direction have the same discrimination information attached to the board-side connector to be connected. Is attached. Thus, the connection destination can be easily determined. Further, the board side connectors 651 to 656 are arranged such that the codes 661b to 666b to which the discrimination information is attached are located in the same direction (here, the left side), whereby the connection direction of the cable side connectors 661 to 666 is established. Can be easily determined.

  Further, the codes 661b to 666b to which the discrimination information is attached are located on the open end side of the front frame 12. Thus, when the front frame 12 is opened and the cables 661 to 666 are connected, the codes 661b to 666b with the identification information are directed to the side that is easy for the operator to see, and the work efficiency is improved.

  The board-side connector 657 is a connector in which pins serving as contact points are arranged in a line in a vertical direction. The cable 667 connected here has a cable-side connector 667a that can be connected to the board-side connector 657, and can be connected by inserting the cable-side connector 667a into the board-side connector 657. The board-side connectors 658 and 659 also have the same number of pins and the same pin arrangement, and can be connected by inserting the cable-side connectors 668a and 669a of the cables 668 and 669 into the board-side connectors 658 and 659, respectively. I have.

  The board side connectors 657 to 659 are given different identification information. The codes 667b to 669b located at one end of the cables 667 to 669 connected to the respective board side connectors 657 to 659 in the code alignment direction have the same discrimination information attached to the board side connector to be connected. Is attached. Thus, the connection destination can be easily determined. Further, the board side connectors 657 to 659 are arranged such that the codes 667b to 669b to which the discrimination information is attached are located in the same direction (here, the lower side), thereby connecting the cable side connectors 667 to 669. The direction can be easily determined.

  The board-side connector 658 is connected to a board-side connector 609 provided in the adjacent first control device 600 via a cable 668. The first control device 600 and the second control device are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and a board-side connector 609 provided in the first control device 600 and a board-side connector 658 provided in the second control device 650 Are arranged so that the pins are aligned in the same direction (in this case, the vertical direction). The board-side connector 609 is arranged such that the code 668b to which the discrimination information is attached is located on the upper side, and the same code 668b is arranged on the board-side connector 658 so as to be located on the lower side. As a result, the cable 668 connecting the board-side connector 609 and the board-side connector 658 is in a twisted state, so that the cable is not separated on the back surface of the gaming machine 10 and noise is cancelled.

  By attaching the discrimination information as described above, the connection destination and connection direction of the cable can be easily known from the discrimination information, and the efficiency of the cable connection work can be improved. In addition, if the board side connector and the cable side connector have the same color so that the connection destination of the cable can be determined, the board side connector and the cable of a color that is no longer used when the design of the gaming machine is changed. A large number of combinations of the side connectors will be left. However, by attaching the discrimination information only to the board-side connector as described above, the cable-side connector can be reused even if the design of the gaming machine is changed, so that there is no surplus.

  From the above, the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the game result is a special result, the gaming machine that generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player controls the gaming machine 10. Control board (a first control device 600 and a second control device 650), and the control board is a board-side connector 601 to a connector for detachably connecting the cables 611 to 618 and 661 to 669. 609, 651 to 659, and the cable includes a plurality of cords arranged in parallel, and among the plurality of cords, the cords 611b to 618b, 661b to 669b located at one end in the cord alignment direction. Is attached to at least a part of the connector, identification information that enables identification with the code located at the other end, and the board-side connector includes a plurality of bases arranged in a predetermined range. Side connector, with the alignment direction of the connected code is arranged to be the same, code discrimination information is attached is that they are arranged so as to be located on the same side in the alignment direction. Here, the discrimination information may be anything as long as it can be distinguished from the code located at the other end, such as adding a color, a pattern, or a character, or providing unevenness or a difference in diameter. The connection direction of the cable can be easily understood from the discrimination information, and the efficiency of the cable connection operation is improved.

  Further, a control frame (an outer frame 11) fixed to the island facility of the game arcade, and a main body frame 12 having one end in the left-right direction rotatably mounted on the support frame with respect to the support frame are provided. The second control device 650) is provided on the open end, which is the other end in the left-right direction on the back surface of the main body frame 12. And the codes 661b to 669b to which the discrimination information is attached are arranged so as to be located closer to the open end in the alignment direction. Therefore, the connection direction of the cable can be easily understood from the discrimination information, and the efficiency of the cable connection operation is improved.

  Further, at least a part of the board-side connector has the same discrimination information as the discrimination information added to the cable connected to the board-side connector. Therefore, the connection destination of the cable can be easily known from the discrimination information, and the efficiency of the cable connection operation is improved.

  In addition, the plurality of board-side connectors arranged in the predetermined range differ from each other in the discrimination information given to at least the adjacent board-side connectors. Therefore, the connection destination of the cable can be easily known from the discrimination information, and the efficiency of the cable connection operation is improved.

  Also, a control for controlling the gaming machine 10 in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the game has a special result. Boards (first control device 600, second control device 650) are provided, and the control boards are board side connectors 601 to 609, 651 which are connectors for detachably connecting cables 611 to 618, 661 to 669. , A plurality of cords are arranged in parallel in one row or a plurality of rows, and among the plurality of cords, the cords 611b to 618b, 661b located at one end in the cord alignment direction. 669b is provided with at least a part of identification information that enables identification with the code located at the other end, and the board-side connector has a plurality of Are arranged in such a manner that the cords to be connected are arranged in the same direction, and identification codes in the arrangement direction are attached to each row of the cable in which a plurality of cords are arranged. Are arranged so that the sides where are located are the same. Therefore, the connection direction of the cable can be easily understood from the discrimination information, and the efficiency of the cable connection operation is improved.

  The discrimination information may be attached to all board-side connectors and cables, or may be attached to some board-side connectors and cables. For example, the discriminating information may be added only to those that are detached during work at a game store such as exchange of a game board. When the discrimination information is added to the board-side connector, the discrimination information may be added when the board-side connector is manufactured, or a mounting portion for adding the discrimination information to a part of the board-side connector is provided. Alternatively, a component serving as the determination information may be attached to the attachment portion later.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the discrimination information is added to both the board-side connector and the cable. The configuration may be such that only In this case, the discrimination information of each code may be the same. Even in such a configuration, the connection direction of the cable can be determined, and the work efficiency can be improved. Also, the identification information corresponding to the board-side connector of the connection destination may be added to the cable-side connector. In this case, it is not necessary to unify the directions of the codes to which the identification information is added.

  Further, the same discrimination information is given to the board-side connector and the cable connected to the board-side connector. However, as long as the combination to be connected can be discriminated, the discrimination information is not necessarily the same but may be the corresponding discrimination information. . Further, the code to which the identification information is attached may or may not be unified to the code connected to a specific pin (for example, one pin). Further, a code adjacent to the code with the identification information may be twisted. This makes the code with the discrimination information easier to understand and more robust against noise.

  Next, an auxiliary effect performed in response to a game effect that is an effect according to the progress of the game will be described. This auxiliary effect is performed by changing the light emission mode of the protrusion 80 and the effect button 25. Further, when a plurality of game effects to be subjected to the auxiliary effect are executed, the auxiliary effect corresponding to the game effect having a predetermined high priority is executed. The game effects targeted for the auxiliary effect include error notification, effect button operation effect, stage effect, decorative special figure start memory display look-ahead effect, and launch direction instruction information in descending order of priority.

  The error notification is an effect of notifying an error occurring in the gaming machine. The effect button operation effect is an effect that notifies that the operation button 25 can be operated. The stage effect is an effect in which an effect divided into a plurality of stages can sequentially progress for each stage. In this stage, a continuous notice for continuously giving a notice over a plurality of special figure change display games from before the start of the special figure change display game based on the target start memory, The so-called pseudo-continuous fluctuating effect is performed in the special figure fluctuating display game in which the temporary fluctuating display for restarting the fluctuating display is performed once or more after temporarily stopping in the result mode other than the special result mode in the decoration special figure fluctuating display game. This includes a step-up notice for giving a notice of the special figure change display game in stages.

  In addition, the decoration special figure start memory display pre-reading effect notifies the information about the start memory by changing the display mode of the decoration special figure start storage display corresponding to the start memory to be notified in the decoration special figure start storage display unit 42. It is a production to do. In addition, the launch direction instruction notification is an effect that notifies the player in which of the rightward and leftward launch directions the game should proceed.

  FIG. 110 shows an example of an execution mode of an auxiliary effect corresponding to each game effect. In FIG. 110, only the protrusion 80, the effect button 25, and the decorative special figure start storage display unit 42 are schematically shown. As shown in FIG. 110 (a), in the auxiliary effect corresponding to the error notification, all the light emitting regions 81 of the protruding portion 80 are lit in red (shown by hatching in the figure). In addition, as shown in FIG. 110 (b), in an auxiliary effect corresponding to the effect button operation effect, the auxiliary effect corresponding to lighting in yellow (indicated by a diagonally lower left line in the figure) indicating that the effect button 25 can be operated. Thus, all the light emitting regions 81 of the protruding portion 80 are lit in yellow. In this case, the effect button 25 forms a game effect device capable of executing a game effect that is an effect according to the progress of the game.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 110 (c), the auxiliary effect corresponding to the stage effect changes according to the stage. In the first stage, the light emitting area 81 and the effect button 25 below the projecting portion 80 are changed to blue. In the second stage, the light emitting area 81 and the effect button 25 below and in the middle of the protrusion 80 flash in yellow in the second stage, and in the third stage, all light emission of the protrusion 80 is performed. The area 81 and the effect button 25 blink in red. In this case, the effect button 25 is also selected as the auxiliary effect device.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 110 (d), in the auxiliary effect corresponding to the decoration special figure start storage display prefetching effect, the target start memory in the decoration special figure start storage display in the decoration special figure start storage display unit 42. The protruding portion 80 is caused to emit light in response to emitting the decorative special figure start storage display corresponding to any one of blue, yellow, and red emission colors. In addition, the decoration special figure start storage display in which the pre-reading effect is not executed is lit in a light-emitting color (for example, white, indicated by a lattice pattern in the figure) other than the light-emitting color at the time of executing the pre-reading effect, and indicates the presence of the start memory. FIG. 110 shows an example in which the look-ahead effect is performed for the start memory having the third digestion order.

  When the first-stage blue display with the lowest expectation as the pre-reading effect in the decoration special figure start storage display is performed, the light-emitting area 81 below the protrusion 80 is lit in blue. When the second stage yellow display, which has a higher degree of expectation than the first stage, is performed as a pre-reading effect in the decoration special figure start storage display, the lower and middle light emitting areas 81 of the protruding portion 80 are colored yellow. Light. When the red display of the third stage, which has the highest expectation as the pre-reading effect in the decoration special figure start storage display, is performed, all the light emitting areas 81 of the protruding portion 80 are lit in red. When a pre-reading effect is performed in a plurality of decorative special figure start storage displays, an auxiliary effect corresponding to an effect having a high degree of expectation is performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 110 (e), in the auxiliary effect corresponding to the launch direction instruction notification, when instructing left-handing, the light emitting region 81 below the projecting portion 80, the light emitting region 81 in the middle, and the light emitting region above. The display area in which light flows from bottom to top is changed by sequentially changing the lighting area in the order of 81. When right-handing is instructed, the light-emitting region 81 in the upper part of the protrusion 80, the light-emitting region 81 in the middle, and the light-emitting region 81 in the lower part are sequentially changed so that the light flows from top to bottom. Display.

  The effect control device 300 performs an auxiliary effect control process shown in FIG. 111 in order to control such an auxiliary effect, and controls the light emission mode of the projecting portion 80 and the effect button 25 that constitute the auxiliary effect device. In this auxiliary effect control process, first, it is determined whether or not an error notification is being executed as a game effect (step C311). If the error notification is being executed (step C311; Y), the error notification is set as the auxiliary effect (step C312), and the auxiliary effect control process ends. If the error notification is not being executed (step C311; N), it is determined whether or not it is time to operate the effect button 25 (step C313).

  If it is the operation button operable timing (step C313; Y), an effect button operation effect is set as an auxiliary effect (step C314), and the auxiliary effect control process ends. If it is not the timing at which the effect button can be operated (step C313; N), it is determined whether the stage effect is being executed (step C315). If the stage effect is being executed (step C315; Y), an effect corresponding to the stage of the stage effect is set as the auxiliary effect (step C316), and the auxiliary effect control process ends. If the stage effect is not being executed (step C315; N), it is determined whether or not the decorative special figure start memory display prefetch effect is being executed (step C317).

  If the decorative special figure start memory display prefetch effect is being executed (step C317; Y), an effect corresponding to the stage of the decorative special figure start memory display prefetch effect is set as the auxiliary effect (step C318), and the auxiliary effect control is performed. The processing ends. If the decorative special figure start memory display prefetching effect is not being executed (step C317; N), it is determined whether or not the firing direction change notification period is in progress (step C319). The firing direction change notification period is a period from when the firing direction when the game is advanced is changed until a predetermined time elapses.

  If it is the firing direction change notification period (step C319; Y), an effect according to the firing direction is set as an auxiliary effect (step C320), and the auxiliary effect control process ends. If it is not the launch direction change notification period (step C321; N), an effect according to the effect of the frame decoration device is set (step C321), and the auxiliary effect control process ends. In this case, the auxiliary effect is not performed.

  By the processing described above, among the game effects being executed, the auxiliary effect corresponding to the game effect with a higher priority is executed. In addition, when the game effect which is the target of the auxiliary effect is not executed, an effect according to another effect is executed. In addition, the priority of the game effect to be the target of the auxiliary effect may be determined according to the current game state, such as whether or not the game is in a high probability state, whether or not it is a time saving state, and an effect mode. .

  In addition, although a plurality of rectangular light emitting areas 81 are provided in the protruding portion 80, a character string such as a model name or a maker name of the gaming machine is arranged in the protruding portion 80, and each of the characters included in the character string emits light. The region 81 may be formed. Further, the light emitting device that emits light on the upper surface of the effect button 25 has a configuration in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a circle, and when a display in which light flows through the protruding portion 80 is performed (for example, FIG. 99 (e)), a circular shape is used. The arranged LEDs may be sequentially illuminated in the circumferential direction to perform a display in which light flows. For example, when performing an auxiliary effect corresponding to the launch direction instruction notification with such an effect button 25, the LED is lit counterclockwise when instructing leftward, and clockwise when instructing rightward. The LED emits light. In addition, the auxiliary effect device is the projection 80 and the effect button 25 provided on the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15, but the auxiliary effect device may be provided at other portions of the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15. For example, when an auxiliary effect device having a plurality of light emitting regions is provided radially from the effect button 25 as a starting point, and an effect button operation effect is performed as an auxiliary effect, an effect such that light flows toward the effect button 25 is performed. You may do it. Further, an auxiliary effect device may be provided on the game board 30.

  From the above, in the gaming machine that executes the variable display game based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result, A game effect device (display device 41, decoration special figure start storage display unit 42, and the like) that can execute a game effect that is a corresponding effect, and an auxiliary effect that can execute an auxiliary effect that is an effect corresponding to the game effect being executed. Device (protruding portion 80, effect button 25), and effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effects in the game effect device and the auxiliary effect device, wherein the effect control device includes a plurality of types of game effect devices. When the game effect is being executed, the auxiliary effect corresponding to the game effect having a predetermined higher priority is controlled by the auxiliary effect device. Therefore, the player can grasp the effect being executed only by paying attention to the auxiliary effect device, and can execute an effective effect.

  Further, a plurality of auxiliary effect devices (protruding portions 80, effect buttons 25) are provided, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) selects an auxiliary effect device that performs an auxiliary effect according to a game effect. Become. Therefore, the effect by the auxiliary effect device can be various, and an effective effect can be executed.

  In addition, a main body frame (front frame 12, glass frame 15) for detachably holding a game board 30 provided with a game effect device (display device 41, decoration special figure start storage display unit 42, and the like) is provided, and an auxiliary effect device ( The protruding portion 80 and the effect button 25) are provided on the main body frame.

  Therefore, the auxiliary effect device can be commonly used between gaming machines having different gaming boards. In addition, even if the model is different, the position of the auxiliary effect device that the player should pay attention to is the same, so that the effect can be performed easily and easily for the player.

  In addition, the priority order is determined in advance for each of the plurality of game states, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) performs the auxiliary effect executed by the auxiliary effect device according to the priority order according to the current game state. Is to be selected. Therefore, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state with the auxiliary effect device, and it is possible to execute an effective effect.

  In the above embodiment, the gaming machine including the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 has been described. However, the gaming machine including only one special variable winning device may be applied. The same applies to the following modifications.

[First Modification]
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted. The parts will be described. The gaming machine of the present modified example is set immediately before and immediately after a round, and sets the length of the opening standby time for waiting for the opening of the special variable prize device opened in the round according to the type of the round. It has become.

  The opening waiting time includes a jackpot fanfare time for waiting for the start of the first round in the special game state, a fanfare time for waiting for the start of the second and subsequent rounds, and processing of the winning prize mouth remaining ball. There is a time, a remaining ball processing time and an ending time to wait for the end of the special game state after the end of the last round in the special game state. In addition, the type of the round includes classification according to each open mode shown in FIG. 8 and whether or not the specific round is a round in which a game ball may flow into the probable operation area 38h forming the specific area. Can be

  In order to set these opening standby times according to the type of round, in step A718 in the special figure displaying process shown in FIG. 55, the jackpot fanfare time can be selected according to at least the type of the first round. . In step A911 in the processing during opening of the special winning opening shown in FIG. 62, the remaining ball processing time can be selected according to the type of the last round. Further, in step A954 in the special winning port remaining ball processing shown in FIG. 64, the ending time can be selected according to the type of the last round.

  Further, in steps A917 and A915 in the processing during opening of the special winning opening shown in FIG. 62, the special winning opening remaining ball processing time (the upper special winning opening remaining ball processing time or the lower special winning opening) is determined according to the type of round to be ended. (Remaining mouth ball processing time) can be selected. Then, in the processing during the fanfare / interval shown in FIG. 59, the processing after step A843 is not performed until the processing time of the special winning prize opening ball corresponding to the special variable winning device to be opened next elapses. In FIGS. 60 and 62, the processing for clearing the special winning port remaining ball processing timer area to 0 (steps A879 and A889) is not performed.

  By performing such a process, for example, the opening standby time of the first special variable prize winning device 38 immediately before and / or immediately after the specific round is set to a longer time than the other opening standby times. Is possible. When the specific round is the first round, the jackpot fanfare time is set in consideration of this, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), since the jackpot fanfare time becomes the opening standby time immediately before the specific round. In this case, it is possible to set the time longer than the big hit fanfare time when the specific round is not the first round.

  If the specific round is other than the first round, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), the interval time set after the round performed immediately before the specific round is set to a time longer than the other interval times. It is possible to In addition to or instead of setting the interval time in this manner, as shown in FIG. 112 (c), the last round in which the first special variable prize winning device 38 has been opened in a round before the specific round. The lower special winning opening remaining ball processing time (first opening standby time) set after the round may be set longer than other lower special winning opening remaining ball processing times. That is, before the specific round, a sufficient time is provided to completely discharge the game balls that may flow into the certain variable operation area 38h in the first special variable winning device 38.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 113A, the interval time (second opening standby time) set after the specific round can be set to be longer than the interval time set other than after the specific round. is there. Also, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), the lower large winning opening residual ball processing time (second opening standby time) set after the specific round is changed to the lower large winning opening residual ball set other than after the specific round. The time can be longer than the processing time. Further, as shown in FIG. 113 (c), when the specific round is the final round, one or both of the remaining ball processing time and the ending time can be longer than when the specific round is not the final round. It is. That is, after the specific round, a sufficient time is provided to completely discharge the game balls that may flow into the certain variable operation area 38h in the first special variable winning device 38.

  Although the example in which the length of the opening standby time is set as to whether or not the round is a specific round has been described, the length of the opening standby time may be set based on a difference between other types. good. For example, the length of the opening standby time may be set based on whether the round is an upper long opening, an upper short opening, a lower V opening, a lower long opening, or a lower short opening. Further, the length of the opening standby time may be set based on the number of rounds. In addition, the length of the opening standby time may be set based on whether or not a game ball has flowed into the certain variation operation area 38h in a specific round.

  As described above, the game is controlled in the gaming machine that executes the variable display game based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. A game control means (game control device 100) and a special variable prize device (first special variable prize device 38, capable of converting a closed state in which game balls cannot be won and an open state in which game balls can be won in a special game state, The second special variable winning device 39), the game control means, in a special game state composed of a plurality of rounds, after the end of each round, waits for opening of the special variable winning device opened in the round The opening standby time (interval time or the winning ball remaining ball processing time) to be set is set, and the opening standby time is set according to the type of the round immediately before or immediately after the opening standby time. And thus it is possible to set the length of the. Therefore, the opening standby time can be changed, and the game in the special game state can be diversified, and the interest can be improved.

  In addition, the special fluctuation winning device (first special fluctuation winning device 38, second special fluctuation winning device 39) includes a specific area (probable operation area 38h) into which a game ball can flow, and a game control means (game control). The device 100) ends the special game state based on the fact that the game ball that has won the special variable winning device flows into the specific region, based on the fact that the game ball does not flow into the specific region. The special game state can be generated later, and the special game state is configured by a plurality of rounds, and is configured to determine whether a game ball flowing into the special variable winning device in a specific round of the plurality of rounds flows into a specific area. A first opening waiting time, which is an opening waiting time for a round in which a special variable prize winning device to be opened in the particular round immediately before the particular round is opened, and / or Of the second open waiting time it is an open waiting time, and thus it is possible to set longer than the opening standby time other than the first opening standby time and the second open waiting time.

  Therefore, a change can be made before or after the specific round, the game in the special game state can be diversified, and the interest can be improved. In addition, by setting the open waiting time before the specific round to be a long time, it is possible to prevent game balls that have flowed into the special variable prize device in the round before the specific round from flowing into the specific area, and to ensure fairness of the game. Can be secured. In addition, by setting the open waiting time after the specific round to be a long time, it is possible to secure time until it is determined whether or not the game ball that has flowed into the special variable winning device in the specific round flows into the specific area, The fairness of the game can be ensured.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 114, the display device 41 may be constituted by a liquid crystal display device. In this case, the effect performed by the rotatable drum-type board effect device 44 may be performed as an image on the display device 41. Of course, a rotatable drum-type board presentation device 44 may be provided. The control of the display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal display device is performed by the effect control device 300. Instead of the display device control circuit 312, a VDP (Video Display Processor) as a graphic processor for performing image processing for video display, It has an image ROM in which character images and video data are stored, an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM. Enable to display effect images.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modified example of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted. The parts will be described. In the gaming machine according to the present modification, a specific round, which is a round in which a game ball may flow into the probable operation area 38h forming a specific area, is the final round.

  FIG. 115 shows the operations of the first special variable prize device 38 and the second special variable prize device 39 in the special gaming state of the gaming machine of the present modified example. In the gaming machine of this modified example, the last round is a specific round, and a game ball can flow into the positive change operation area 38h forming a specific area in the lower long opening or the lower short opening in the final round.

  In FIG. 116, the upper row shows the execution mode of the special game state with the 5R probability big hit, and the lower row shows the execution mode of the special game state with the 6R normal big hit. Also, the middle row shows the execution mode of the effect common to both special game states. In addition, the behavior of the 10th round and the 11th round in the 11R probability change big hit is the same as the behavior shown in the upper row.

  In the case of the 5R probability change jackpot, the game control device 100 transmits a round command corresponding to the fourth round to the effect control device 300 at the start of the fourth round, which is one round before the final round (t201). The fourth round is the upper long opening, and at the start of the round, the game control device 100 also transmits a long opening command to the effect control device 300 (t201). The effect control device 300 performs the effect of long opening in response to the reception of the long opening command (t201 to t202).

  Thereafter, when the fourth round is completed, the game control device 100 transmits an interval command to the effect control device 300 (t202), and the interval time is reached (t202 to t203). The effect control device 300 performs an interval effect with the reception of the interval command (t202 to t203).

  When the interval time ends, the fifth round is started. This round is a lower long release, and at the start of the round, the game control device 100 transmits a round command corresponding to the fifth round and a long release command to the effect control device 300 (t203). In addition, this round is a specific round, and the lever solenoid is turned on, and the positive-variable operation area switch is enabled. The effect control device 300 performs an effect of long opening in response to the reception of the long opening command (t203 to t204).

  Thereafter, when the fifth round is completed, the remaining ball processing time becomes, and when the remaining ball processing time elapses, the ending time becomes. Then, when the ending time elapses, the special game state ends (t207). When the fifth round ends, the game control device 100 transmits an ending command to the effect control device 300 (t204), and the effect control device 300 performs an ending effect with the reception of the ending command (t204 to t207). Since the remaining ball processing time is 1300 ms and the ending time is 4000 ms, the length of the ending effect is 5300 ms.

  The 4th and 5th rounds in the case of the 6R ordinary big hit are the same as the 4th and 5th rounds of the 5R certain big hit. However, since the fifth round of the 6R normal jackpot is not a specific round, the lever solenoid remains off, and the positive-variable operation area switch remains invalid. Then, at the end of the fifth round just before the last round, the game control device 100 transmits an end command instead of an interval command to the effect control device 300 (t204). The effect control device 300 performs an ending effect in response to receiving the ending command (t204 to t207).

  However, the game control device 100 performs processing to shift to the next round, and after the end of the fifth round, the interval time is reached (t204 to t205), and when the interval time elapses, the final round, the sixth round, is started. In addition, this round is a specific round, and the lever solenoid is turned on, and the positive-variable operation area switch is enabled. However, in this specific round, the opening time of the first special variable prize winning device 38 is short, and the possibility that a game ball flows into the certain variable operation region 38h forming the specific region is extremely low.

  The opening of the lower short in the sixth round of the normal big hit constitutes the third execution mode, and the lower long opening of the fifth round in the above-mentioned probability changing big hit makes the game to the specific area (probable operation area 38h) than in the third execution mode. A fourth execution mode in which the inflow of the sphere is easy and the execution period is longer than the third execution mode is provided.

  At the start of the sixth round, the game control device 100 transmits a round command corresponding to the sixth round to the effect control device 300 (t205), but the effect control device 300 does not perform a round effect based on this round command. Continue the ending production that has already started. Further, when the sixth round is completed, the game control device 100 does not transmit an ending command to the effect control device 300 (t206), sets a remaining ball processing time as a process for ending the special game state, and sets a remaining ball processing time. After, the ending time is set. Then, when the ending time elapses, the special game state ends (t207).

  Here, the interval time after the end of the fifth round is 300 ms, and the duration time of the sixth round (same as the opening time of the first special variable winning device 38) is 200 ms. Since the remaining ball processing time is 1300 ms and the ending time is 3500 ms, the length of the ending effect is 5300 ms. That is, the time for executing the ending effect is the same as that in the case of the probability change big hit, and the same ending effect as the case of the probability change big hit is executed.

  As described above, by performing the ending effect in the specific round in the normal jackpot, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of the specific round in which the possibility that the game ball flows into the probable operation area 38h forming the specific area is extremely low. It is possible to reduce disappointment in the case of a big hit. In addition, the effect can be apparently the same between the 5R odd-change jackpot and the 6R normal jackpot, making it difficult for the player to distinguish between them. This can also reduce disappointment in the case of a normal jackpot.

(Processing while opening the big winning opening)
In order to perform the above-described processing, the special winning opening processing shown in FIG. 117 is performed instead of the special winning opening processing shown in FIG. 62. In the special winning opening processing, when the round is not the final round (step A906; N), the special winning opening data and the interval time (here, 300 ms) corresponding to the number of rounds are saved in the special figure game processing timer area ( (Step A907), the processing number is set to “3” for the processing during the fanfare / interval (step A910), and it is determined whether or not the round is immediately before the last round in the normal hit (6R normal big hit) (step A907). A2201).

  If it is not the round just before the last round in the normal hit (6R normal big hit) (step A2201; N), an interval command is prepared (step A908), effect command setting processing is performed (step A909), and step A915 is performed. Move to If the round is one before the final round in the normal hit (6R normal big hit) (step A2201; Y), an ending command is prepared (step A912), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A913). Then, the process shifts to step A915.

  On the other hand, if it is the last round (step A906; Y), the special winning game opening data and the remaining ball processing time (here, 1300 ms) corresponding to the number of rounds are saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A911). The processing number is set to “5” for the special winning port remaining ball processing (step A914), and it is determined whether or not the final round in the normal winning (6R normal big hit) (step A2202).

  If it is the last round in the normal hit (6R normal big hit) (step A2202; Y), the process proceeds to step A915. That is, in this case, since the ending command has already been transmitted at the end of the previous round, the ending command is not transmitted here. If the round is not the final round in the normal hit (6R normal big hit) (step A2202; N), an ending command is prepared (step A912), effect command setting processing is performed (step A913), and the process proceeds to step A915.

[Fanfare / interval processing]
Also, the processing during the fanfare / interval shown in FIG. 118 is performed in place of the processing during the fanfare / interval shown in FIG. In this fanfare / interval processing, in steps A841 and A859, it is determined whether the last or the odd round has started. In addition, it is not determined whether the current round is the final round (step A851), and the final round is a specific round in the determination whether the current round is the lever solenoid operation round (step A852). It is determined that this is a round (step A852; Y).

[Big hit command processing]
Also, the big hit command processing shown in FIG. 119 is performed instead of the big hit command processing shown in FIG. In the big hit command processing, it is determined whether or not the ending effect has been started (step C351) instead of determining whether or not a short-circuit release other than the specific round has been performed (step C144). If the ending effect has been started (step C351; Y), the big hit command processing ends. That is, when the round command transmitted at the start of the final round of the 6R normal big hit is received, the processing related to the round command is not performed. If the ending effect has not been started (step C351; N), the round command information is saved (step C145), and the big hit command processing ends.

  As described above, the game is controlled in the gaming machine that executes the variable display game based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. A game control means (game control device 100) and a special area (where a game ball can be converted into a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won and an open state in which a game ball can be won in a special game state, into which a game ball can flow). A special variable prize device (first special variable prize device 38) having a certain variable operation region 38h), and the game control means performs a game based on the fact that the game ball which has won the special variable prize device flows into the specific region. A game state that is more advantageous to the player than when the ball has not flowed into the specific area can be generated after the end of the special game state, and out of a plurality of rounds in which the special variable winning device is opened, It is configured to determine whether the game ball that has flowed into the special variable prize winning device in the round has flowed into a specific area, and there are a plurality of special results, and the execution mode of the final round according to the type of the special result And selecting one of a third execution mode and a fourth execution mode in which a game ball can easily flow into a specific area than the third execution mode and has a longer execution period than the third execution mode. The effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game, when the final round is in the third execution mode, during the period from the end of the round immediately before the final round to the end of the special game state. An ending effect of a predetermined length that can be executed over a predetermined length is executed, and when the final round is the fourth execution mode, the ending effect is executed after the end of the final round. And thus was Unishi. Therefore, a period during which it is difficult to flow into the specific area due to the ending effect can be made inconspicuous, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be prevented.

[Third Modification]
Next, a third modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted. The parts will be described. The gaming machine of the present modified example is different in the execution mode of the condition achievement effect.

  In the gaming machine of the present modified example, a condition achievement effect can be started based on a predetermined start condition being satisfied. As the predetermined start condition, when it is clear that there is a start memory that results in a big hit by the pre-reading process, or when the start lottery of the condition achievement effect is won, a specific change pattern in the special figure change display game is There is a case where the user has selected the item. However, since the condition of the regular production and the condition achievement production are of the same type, if the regular production is executed during the execution of the condition achievement production, the condition may be achieved unintentionally or the condition may not be achieved. When the execution period of the condition attainment effect and the regular effect overlap, a process is performed to prevent inconvenience.

  In FIG. 120, the start condition of the condition achievement effect is satisfied in the 25th game from the end of the special game state, and the condition achievement effect for 10 games is started. An example is shown in which a regular performance is scheduled and overlaps with the condition achievement performance period. In such a case, any of the processes (1) to (3) can be performed as a method for preventing inconvenience from occurring.

  The processing of (1) is to end the condition attainment effect by the start of the regular effect. Note that the end timing may be any time until the start of the regular effect (or even before the start of the condition effect). The processing of (2) is to start the condition achievement effect after the regular effect. Note that the start timing may be any time after the end of the special figure fluctuation display game for executing the regular effect (or may be after the end of the condition effect). In these cases, the value of the number of high-probability fluctuations for executing the condition achievement effect is set to be in each period.

  In the process of (3), the condition attainment effect is executed for a period (here, 10 games) set at the start of the condition attainment effect regardless of the presence or absence of the periodical effect. The condition may be changed before the start of the operation to prevent inconvenience. FIG. 121 shows an example of an execution mode of the condition achievement effect in this example.

  As shown in FIG. 121 (a), in the 25th game from the end of the special game state, the start condition of the condition achievement effect is satisfied, and the condition achievement effect is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (b), the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation display game, which is the 25th game from the end of the special game state, is started, and ends with the deviation result as shown in FIG. 121 (c). . Further, as shown in FIG. 121 (d), the special figure variation display game which is the 26th game is started from the end of the special game state, and as shown in FIG. 121 (e), the special figure variation display game which executes a regular effect. Has been generated.

  With the occurrence of the start memory a, the game control device 100 performs a prefetching process, and determines whether the result of the special figure change display game based on the start memory a is a special result or a change pattern. The determination result is also transmitted to the effect control device 300. Here, it has been found that the result of the special figure change display game based on the start memory a is incorrect due to the pre-reading process, and the change pattern of the SP1 reach is selected as the regular effect. In this case, the start memory that is consumed before the start memory a for executing the regular effect does not include a result that has a special result.

  Based on the result of the pre-reading, effect control device 300 changes the condition to be notified to the player to SP2 reach, and notifies as shown in FIG. 121 (f). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 121 (h), the special figure change display game based on the start memory a, which is a regular effect, is started, and reaches SP1 reach as shown in FIG. 121 (i). Thereafter, a deviation result is derived as shown in FIG. 121 (j). However, as described above, the condition for notifying the player is SP2 reach, and the condition is not achieved, and the deviation result is obtained. There is no inconsistency in the condition achievement production.

  If the result of the special figure change display game based on the start memory for executing the regular effect is a special result and the change pattern of the SP1 reach is selected as the regular effect, the condition is set to the SP1 reach. By providing the case of changing to, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation even if there is a change. Also, the starting memory that is consumed during the period of the condition achievement effect and does not perform the regular effect is also used if the pre-reading result indicates that there is a starting memory with a special result. The condition may be changed to a variation pattern of the special figure variation display game based on the storage.

  From the above, a predetermined random number is extracted based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37), and a predetermined upper limit number is set as the starting memory which becomes the execution right of the variable display game. Starting storage means (game control device 100), and preliminary determination means (game control device) for determining a random number stored as start storage in the start storage means prior to the start of the variable display game based on the start storage. 100), and the regular effect control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300), based on a random number, from among a plurality of effects that can be executed as a regular effect, in a variable display game that is the execution timing of the regular effect. Is selected and executed, and the condition achievement effect control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) performs the When one of the regular effects is selected and set from among a plurality of effects that can be executed as a regular effect, and the execution of the regular effect by the regular effect control unit is included in a predetermined period in which the condition achieving effect is executed, the regular effect is executed. The set condition can be changed based on the result determined by the preliminary determination unit and the type of the regular effect for the variable display game to be executed. Therefore, when the regular performance is performed during the execution of the condition achievement effect, the condition can not be achieved or the condition can be achieved in the regular effect, and the condition achievement effect and the regular effect overlap. Can be prevented.

[Fourth Modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted. The parts will be described. The gaming machine of the present modified example is different in the execution mode of the condition achievement effect.

  In the gaming machine of this modified example, the SP reach effect executed in the regular effect is set as the condition of the subsequent condition achieving effect. FIG. 122 shows an example of a condition attainment effect in the gaming machine of the present modification. As shown in FIGS. 122 (a) to 122 (e), the SP1 reach is executed as a regular effect, and the process ends with an unsuccessful result, and the condition achievement effect starts from the next special figure variation display game as shown in FIG. 122 (f). Have been. Here, since the SP1 reach was executed as the regular effect, the SP1 reach is set as the condition of the condition achieving effect. Then, in the special figure variation display game in which the result is a special result during the execution of the condition achievement effect, a reach state occurs as shown in FIG. 122 (h), and a SP1 reach is achieved as shown in FIG. 122 (i). And a special result is derived as shown in FIG.

[Variation pattern setting processing]
In order to perform such control, a variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 123 is performed instead of the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. In this variation pattern setting process, when the number of high-probability variations is a value of a regular effect (step A2301; Y), a condition flag corresponding to the lottery result is saved (step A2302). As a result, the information of the fluctuation pattern set in the regular effect (here, any one of SP1 to SP3) is stored. In the effect control device 300, the start of the condition achievement effect and the notification of the condition are performed in the next special figure change display game based on the information on the change pattern executed in the regular effect.

[Special figure information setting processing]
Also, the special figure information setting processing shown in FIG. 124 is performed instead of the special figure information setting processing shown in FIG. In this special figure information setting process, the determination whether the number of times of high probability change is the value of the condition achievement effect (Step A454) is performed before the determination whether the stop symbol pattern is a lost symbol (Step A453). If the number of high-probability changes is the value of the condition achievement effect (step A454; Y), the variable group selection pointer is updated to the value of the condition achievement effect according to the stop symbol pattern number and the condition flag (step A454). A458).

  Further, in the gaming machine of this modification, a table shown in FIG. 125 is used as a change group table selectable in a high probability state, instead of the table shown in FIG. FIGS. 125 (a) to (c) are the same as FIGS. 52 (a) to (c). FIG. 125 (d) is used when the result is a big hit and the condition achievement effect is not being executed, and when the result is a big hit and the condition achievement effect is being executed, FIGS. 125 (e) to (g) are used. . 125 (e) to 125 (g) are selected by the condition flag, and when the regular effect is SP1 reach and SP1 reach is set as a condition, FIG. 125 (e) is used and only SP1 reach can be selected. . Similarly, when the regular production is SP2 reach and SP2 reach is set as a condition, FIG. 125 (f) is used and only SP2 reach can be selected, and the regular production is SP3 reach and SP3 reach is set as a condition. If it is, FIG. 125 (g) is used and only SP3 reach can be selected.

  As described above, by setting the effect performed in the regular effect as a condition, the condition achievement effect is started after the content of the condition is shown to the player, and the effect is easy to understand for the player. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in expectation due to a loss of SP reach performed as a regular effect.

[Fifth Modification]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted. The parts will be described. The gaming machine of this modification is different in the execution mode of the special figure variable display game.

  In the gaming machine of this modification, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed simultaneously. However, if one special figure variable display game ends with a special result during execution of one special figure variable display game, the one special figure variable display game is determined as a result other than the special result (outlier result). I try to end it.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present modified example, there are a big hit and a small hit in the special result, and a special game state also occurs when the small hit occurs. In the special game state based on the small hit, the first special variable prize device 38 or the second special variable prize device is opened as in the special game state. However, the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device (first special result), and the small hit is a special result without the operation of the condition device (second special result). The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special figure change display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device is operated, for example, a big hit state is generated and a special electric accessory is generated. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the first special variable prize device 38 or the second special variable prize device 39 is set (the continuous action device is activated). The condition device not operating means that the above-mentioned flag is not set, for example, as in the case of winning a small hit lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag which is turned on / off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch which is turned on / off electrically. In addition, the "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to the present specification. It is used as a term having various meanings.

  FIG. 126 shows that one special figure fluctuation display game ends with a special result (big hit or small hit) during execution of one special figure fluctuation display game, and the other special figure fluctuation display game ends with a special result. An example in which the process is ended with the result (missing result) is shown. The timing of ending the one special figure change display game as a result other than the special result (outcome result) is at the end of the special figure change display game that has become the special result, that is, at the end of the result display time. is there.

  FIG. 126 (a) shows an example in which the special figure 2 variable display game is terminated with a big hit during the special figure 2 variable display game's variable time, and the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly ended as a result of a loss. Indicated. First, the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is a big hit is started (t301), and thereafter, the special figure 2 variable display game is started (t302). The result of the special figure 2 variable display game is one of a big hit, a small hit or a miss. Further, at the start of each special figure variable display game, a variable time is set, and at the end of the variable time, the display time of the result is set. The special figure 1 variable display game is completed before the special figure 2 variable display game later than the end timing (t304) of the variable figure display game in FIG.

  When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends (t303) and the display time for displaying the result ends, the special figure 1 variable display game ends with a big hit (t304). At this time, the special figure 2 variable display game during the variable time is forcibly stopped with the result of the special figure 2 variable display game with termination of the special figure 1 variable display game regardless of the result of the special figure 2 variable display game (t304). Thus, the special figure 2 change display game ends. Even when the special figure 1 variable display game is ended (t304) during the display time for displaying the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is also forcibly ended with the result of the disconnection. Will be done. The same is true even if the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit.

  FIG. 126 (b) shows an example in which the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly changed to a disconnection result by ending the special figure 2 variable display game with a small hit during the display time of the special figure 1 variable display game. showed that. First, the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is a big hit is started (t311), and thereafter, the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is a small hit is started (t312).

  Thereafter, the fluctuating time of the special figure 1 fluctuating display game ends (t313), and the display time for displaying the result is reached. However, as described later, when the result is a large hit, the result is longer than when the result is a small hit or a loss. The display time is set (t313 to t316). Before the display time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game ends (t314), and the display time also ends (t315). Ends with a small hit. With the end of the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly changed from the jackpot result to the disconnection result (t315), and with the end of the newly set display time, the special figure is displayed. The one-variation display game ends (t316).

  In other words, before the end of the display time for displaying the result in one special figure change display game and before the end of the special figure change display game, the other special figure change display game becomes a special result (big hit or small hit). When the display time is over and the special figure change display game ends, the one special figure change display game is ended as a result other than the special result (miss result). In addition, before the display time for displaying the result in one special figure fluctuation display game ends and before the special figure fluctuation display game ends, the display time ends as the other special figure fluctuation display game ends in a loss result. When the special-figure variable display game ends, the one special-figure variable display game continues without any influence.

  FIGS. 126 (c) and (d) show the display time tables for setting the display time for displaying the result. FIG. 126 (c) shows the display time table 1 used when a big hit has not yet occurred after turning on the gaming machine with RAM clear or when less than 100 games have elapsed since the end of the special game state with the big hit. Indicated. FIG. 126 (d) shows the display time table 2 used when 100 or more games have passed since the end of the special game state accompanying the big hit. Note that, in the gaming machine of the present modification, in the case of a probability change big hit, the high probability state continues until the next big hit.

  In any case, when the result is the normal symbol A to C, which is a normal big hit, the result is lost, and a longer display time is set than in the case of the positively changing symbol and the small hit symbol. In the case of a small hit symbol, a very short display time is set. Therefore, in the case of the normal big hit, there is a high possibility that the other special figure change display game will end as a small hit or a certain variable big hit before the end of the display time, compared to the case of the other result, and the normal big hit will be forced. It is highly likely that the result will be changed to the result. In particular, in the case of a small hit, the display time is extremely short, and a short change time is set, so that there is a high possibility that the special figure change display game is ended first with the small hit result. .

  Thereby, especially during the high probability state, it is possible to avoid that the high probability state is not continued because the big hit is usually changed to the loss result. In addition, the display time of the normal symbols A to C whose result is the normal big hit is longer in the display time table 2 than in the display time table 1. Thus, in the case of the so-called humble state in which the next big hit does not easily occur despite the high probability state, the possibility of avoiding the normal big hit is increased, and the possibility that the next big hit is also a probability changed big hit is increased. Has been. Further, in the display time table 1 shown in FIG. 126 (c), the display time differs depending on the normal symbols A to C, and the possibility of avoiding the normal big hit is different, so that interest is enhanced.

[Timer interrupt processing]
In order to perform the above processing, the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 127 is performed instead of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In this timer interrupt process, when an abnormal discharge error is not occurring (step S109; N), a start-up switch monitoring process is performed (step S111a). This starting port switch monitoring process is the process shown in FIG. Then, instead of the special figure game processing, a special figure 1 game processing (step S111b) for performing processing relating to the special figure 1 variable display game and a special figure 2 game processing (step S111c) for performing processing relating to the special figure 2 variable display game are performed. Do. In the gaming machine of the present modification, the ordinary variable prize device 37 for giving the start condition of the special figure 2 variable display game can always be awarded, and a general figure game for controlling the opening and closing of the ordinary variable prize device 37 is provided. No processing is performed. Therefore, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is a winning opening that does not require fraud monitoring.

[Special figure 1 game processing]
FIG. 128 shows the special figure 1 game process (step S111b) in the timer interrupt process described above. The control of the entire process relating to the special figure 1 variable display game and the setting of the display of the special figure 1 are performed. In the special figure 1 game process, first, during the big hit / small hit of the special figure 2, that is, during the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. Is determined (step Y101).

  If the special figure 2 is not in the big hit / small hit (step Y101; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y102), and if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, −1 is updated (step Y103). ). If the big hit / small hit in the special map 2 is being performed (step Y101; Y), the process proceeds to step Y103. In the special winning opening switch monitoring processing, the upper winning opening switch monitoring processing shown in FIG. 35, the lower winning opening switch monitoring processing shown in FIG. 36, the positive change operation area switch monitoring processing shown in FIG. 37, and FIG. The remaining ball processing timer updating process and the lever solenoid control process shown in FIG. 68 are performed. In the special figure 1 game process, a special winning state switch monitoring process is performed for a special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit or a small hit, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in a special figure 2 game process described later.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). If the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the flow shifts to step Y119 to perform the subsequent processing. If the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already expired, the processing branches to the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. Is set in the register (step Y105). Then, by using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number is obtained (step Y106), and a subroutine call based on the special figure 1 game processing number is performed (step Y107).

  In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is “0”, the start of the change of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of the change of the special figure 1 variable display game, the setting of the effect, the special figure 1 The special figure 1 usual processing (step Y108) for setting information necessary for performing the processing during fluctuation in FIG. 1 is performed. If the special figure 1 game processing number is “1” in step Y107, the special figure for setting the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure 1 display is performed. The processing during one fluctuation (step Y109) is performed.

  In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the big hit type and the setting of each big hit type A special figure 1 displaying process (step Y110) for setting a fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing the process during the fanfare / interval, and the like is performed.

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is “3” in step Y107, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, the update of the number of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening processing, and the like are performed. The processing to be performed during the fanfare / interval (step Y111) is performed. This processing during the fanfare / interval (step Y111) is the processing shown in FIG. In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is “4”, if the big hit round is not the last round, an interval command is set, and if it is the last round, an ending command is set. A special winning opening process (step Y112) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed. This processing during opening of the special winning opening (step Y112) is the processing shown in FIG.

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is “5” in step Y107, if the big hit round is the last round, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball in the special winning opening or the special figure 1 A special winning port remaining ball process (step Y113) for setting information necessary for performing the jackpot end process is performed. This special winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y113) is the processing shown in FIG. If the special figure 1 game processing number is "6" in step Y107, the special figure 1 big hit end processing (step Y114) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 ordinary processing (step Y108) I do. The special figure 1 big hit end processing (step Y114) is to execute the big hit end processing shown in FIG. 65 for the special figure 1 variable display game.

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is "7" in step Y107, the opening time and opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small hit are performed. During the small hit fanfare (step Y115), the information necessary for the setting is set. If the special figure 1 game processing number is "8" in step Y107, a small hitting middle processing (step Y116) for setting an ending command and setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. Do.

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is “9” in step Y107, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball won in the big winning opening during the small hitting processing or the processing for ending the small hitting A small hit remaining sphere process (step Y117) for setting information necessary for the process is performed. If the special figure 1 game processing number is "10" in step Y107, special figure 1 small hit end processing (step Y118) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 ordinary processing is performed.

  After that, a special figure 1 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (step Y119), and a pattern change control process (step Y120) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. FIG. 1 The game processing ends. The special figure 1 game process performs a series of execution control for the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special figure 2 game processing]
FIG. 129 shows the special figure 2 game process (step X111) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the special figure 2 game process, the control of the entire processing relating to the special figure 2 variable display game and the setting of the display of the special figure 2 are performed. The special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-described special figure 1 game processing for the special figure 2.

  In the special figure 2 game process, first, whether the special figure 1 is in a big hit / small hit, that is, in the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit Is determined (step Y131). If it is not during the big hit / small hit in the special figure 1 (step Y131; N), a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y132), and if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y132). Step Y133). If the big hit / small hit in the special map 1 is being performed (step Y131; Y), the process proceeds to step Y133.

  In the special winning opening switch monitoring processing, the upper winning opening switch monitoring processing shown in FIG. 35, the lower winning opening switch monitoring processing shown in FIG. 36, the positive change operation area switch monitoring processing shown in FIG. 37, and FIG. The remaining ball processing timer updating process and the lever solenoid control process shown in FIG. 68 are performed. In the special figure 2 game processing, a special winning state switch monitoring process is performed for a special game state that is executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state that is executed based on the result of the game being a big hit or a small hit, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 1 game process described above.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the flow shifts to step Y152 to perform the subsequent processing. If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134; Y), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already elapsed, the processing branches to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number. Is set in the register (step Y136). Then, by using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is obtained (step Y137), and a subroutine call based on the special figure 2 game processing number is performed (step Y138).

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is “0” in step Y138, the start of the change of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of the change of the special figure 2 variable display game, the setting of the effect, the special figure 2 FIG. 2 A special figure 2 ordinary processing (step Y139) for setting information necessary for performing the processing during fluctuation is performed. If the special figure 2 game processing number is “1” in step Y138, the special figure for setting the stop display time of the special figure 2 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 displaying process is performed. A process during two fluctuations (step Y140) is performed.

  In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit and the setting of each big hit type The special figure 2 displaying process (step Y141) for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is “3” in step Y138, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the special winning opening, and the like are performed. The processing of the fanfare / interval to be performed (step Y142) is performed. This processing during the fanfare / interval (step Y142) is the processing shown in FIG. If the special figure 2 game processing number is “4” in step Y138, an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the last round, while an ending command is set if the big hit round is the last round. A special winning opening process (step Y143) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed. This processing during opening of the special winning opening (step Y143) is the processing shown in FIG.

  In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the last round, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball in the special winning opening or the special figure 2 A special winning opening remaining ball process (step Y144) for setting information necessary for performing the big hit end process is performed. This special winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y144) is the processing shown in FIG. If the special figure 2 game processing number is “6” in step Y138, the special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y145) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 ordinary processing (step Y108) I do. The special figure 1 big hit end processing (step Y145) is to execute the big hit end processing shown in FIG. 65 for the special figure 2 variable display game.

  In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", to set the opening time and opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, set the fanfare command, and perform the small hitting middle processing In the small hit fanfare processing (step Y146) for setting the information necessary for the operation is performed. If the special figure 2 game processing number is "8" in step Y138, a small hitting middle processing (step Y147) for setting an ending command, setting information necessary for performing a small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. Do.

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is “9” in step Y138, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball that has won in the big winning opening during the small hitting middle processing, or the processing for ending the small hitting A small hit remaining sphere process (step Y148) for setting information necessary for the process is performed. If the special figure 2 game processing number is "10" in step Y138, special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y149) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 ordinary processing is performed.

  After that, a special figure 2 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (step Y152), and a symbol change control process (step Y153) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. FIG. 2 ends the game processing. The special figure 2 game process performs a series of execution control for the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The above-described special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-described special figure 1 game processing for the special figure 2. In the following description, the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. The corresponding processes will be described in parallel.

[Special Figure 1 Normal Processing]
FIG. 130 shows the special figure 1 ordinary processing (step Y108) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing. In the special map 1 usual processing, first, it is determined whether the change of the special map 1 can be started (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 can start to change in this determination means that the state is not between the end of the special figure 2 change display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special game state. It should be noted that, while the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed or the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game is in a state where the fluctuation cannot be started, in this case, the special figure 1 ordinary processing is not executed. Here, this need not be determined.

  If the special figure 1 cannot be started to change (step Y201; N), the special figure 1 ordinary processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y210), and the special figure 1 ordinary processing ends. If the special figure 1 can start to change (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figure 1 is 0 (step Y202). When the number of reserved special figure 1 is 0 (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y210. If the number of reserved special figure 1 is not 0 (step Y202; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y203), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y204).

  Thereafter, a special figure 1 change start process for setting information relating to the special figure 1 change display game is performed (step Y205), and a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared (step Y206). Then, effect command setting processing is performed (step Y207). Note that at the time of performing the process of preparing the decoration special figure reservation number command (step Y206), the special figure 1 reservation number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the current special figure 1 reservation is not performed. A reserved number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number obtained by subtracting -1 from the number is prepared.

  Next, the special figure status change area is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y208). Thereafter, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting processing is performed (step Y209), and the special figure 1 ordinary processing ends. Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure change display game, and any one of 0 to 5 is set. The special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, the special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed, The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. The special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are executed, and the special figure status 4 is a first special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit. The special figure status 5 indicates a second special game state, which is a special game state based on a small hit. Here, since the special figure 1 change display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

[Special Figure 2 Normal Processing]
FIG. 131 shows the special figure 2 ordinary processing (step Y139) in the above-described special figure 2 game processing. In the special figure 2 usual processing, first, it is determined whether the fluctuation of the special figure 2 can be started (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 can start to change in this determination means that the state is not between the stop of the change of the special figure 1 change display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special game state. It should be noted that, while the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game is in a state in which the fluctuation cannot be started, in this case, the special figure 2 is not in the normal processing. Here, this need not be determined.

  If the change of the special figure 2 is not possible (step Y221; N), the special figure 2 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y234), and the special figure 2 normal processing ends. In addition, when the special figure 2 can start to change (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether the number of reserved special figure 2 is 0 (step Y222).

  When the number of reserved special figure 2 is not 0 (step Y222; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y224). Thereafter, a special figure 2 change start process for setting information relating to the special figure 2 change display game is performed (step Y225), and the special figure 2 is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y226). Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status. After that, a special figure 2 changing processing transition setting processing is performed (step Y227), and the special figure 2 ordinary processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y228). If the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y228; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is changing (step Y229). If the special figure 1 is not fluctuating (step Y229; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step Y230). If not (step Y230; N), the customer waiting state is set. Performs processing related to settings. Also, if the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (step Y228; N), if the special figure 1 is changing (step Y229; Y), or if the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step Y230; Y), Then, the process proceeds to Step Y234.

  In the process related to the setting of the customer waiting state, first, a customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step Y231), and a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y232). A command setting process is performed (step Y233), and the process proceeds to step Y234. By making the customer waiting demonstration command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

  Further, if the effect control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the effect control device 300 without the backup function loses the information of the game state, so that it is impossible to perform an appropriate effect. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, from the receipt of this command, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state, and to transmit the probability information command based on the change of the game state. It is possible to return to the effect according to the gaming state earlier than waiting.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be simultaneously executed, and the probability state may be changed by the processing of the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, a change start probability information command is transmitted each time the special figure change display game is started (steps Y203 and Y223). This allows the effect control device 300 to perform an appropriate effect according to the gaming state.

  Further, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command every time the special figure fluctuation display game is started, even if the production control device 300 is restarted, the production according to the game state can be performed after receiving this command. Thus, it is possible to return to the effect corresponding to the game state earlier than waiting for the transmission of the probability information command based on the change of the game state. It should be noted that the customer waiting demonstration command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for enabling the effect to be returned to the effect according to the gaming state when the effect control device 300 is restarted.

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
FIG. 132 shows the special figure 1 change start processing (step Y205) in the above-described special figure 1 ordinary processing. This special figure 1 change start processing is processing performed at the start of the special figure 1 change display game. First, a special figure 1 information setting flag indicating the type of the special figure variable display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the variable symbol determination area (step Y241), and the special figure variable display game in which the effect mode is changed is set. A game count command corresponding to the value of the game count area for managing the execution count is prepared (step A242), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A243).

  After that, a big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y244) for setting miss information, big hit information or small hit information as result information of the special figure 1 variable display game is performed. Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A245) relating to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed. 1 information setting process (step A246) to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which various kinds of information relating to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game are set. (Step A247). After that, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step A248) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting for setting information of a fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. The processing (step A249) is performed.

  Next, a time reduction variation number update process for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the high probability state and the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the time reduction state is performed (step Y250). In the gaming machine of this modification, a sufficiently large value (for example, 10,000) is set as an initial value of the number of times of high probability change and the number of times of time shortening change in the case of a probability change big hit so that the high probability state continues until the next big hit. Have been.

  Thereafter, "1" is set as the special figure 1 game processing number (step A251), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step A252). Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A253), and a signal related to the start of the change of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A254). Thereafter, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A255), and the initial value of the blink control timer (the timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is stored in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (step A255). Here, 100 ms is set (step A256), an initial value (here, 0) is set in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A257), and the special figure 1 variation start process ends.

  The initial value set in the special figure 1 variable symbol number area is 0, so that variable display is started from a state where all segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state where the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 133 shows the special figure 2 change start processing (step Y225) in the above-described special figure 2 ordinary processing. This special figure 2 change start processing is processing performed at the start of the special figure 2 change display game. First, a special figure 2 information setting flag indicating the type of the special figure variable display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the variable symbol determination area (step Y261), and the special figure variable display game for changing the effect mode is performed. A game count command corresponding to the value of the game count area for managing the execution count is prepared (step A262), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A263).

  After that, a big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y264) for setting miss information, big hit information or small hit information as result information of the special figure 2 variable display game is performed. Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A265) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is set. A 2 information setting process (step A266) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which various kinds of information relating to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are set. (Step A267). Thereafter, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step A268) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting for setting information of a fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed. The processing (step A269) is performed.

  Next, a time reduction variation number update process for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the high probability state and the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the time reduction state is performed (step Y270). In the gaming machine of this modification, a sufficiently large value (for example, 10,000) is set as an initial value of the number of times of high probability change and the number of times of time shortening change in the case of a probability change big hit so that the high probability state continues until the next big hit. Have been.

  Thereafter, "1" is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (step A271), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step A272). Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A273), and a signal related to the start of the change of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A274). Thereafter, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A275), and the initial value of the blink control timer (the timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is stored in the special figure 2 blink control timer area (step A275). Here, 100 ms) is set (step A276), an initial value (here, 0) is set in the special figure 2 variable symbol number area (step A277), and the special figure 2 variable start process ends.

  The initial value to be set in the special figure 2 variable symbol number area is 0, so that the variable display is started from a state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state where the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

[Processing during special figure 1 fluctuation]
FIG. 134 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y109) in the above-described special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 change processing, first, the number of times of symbol determination output is updated by +1 (step Y301), a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y302), and the effect command setting processing is performed. Performed (Step Y303).

  Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y304), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y305). In the gaming machine of this modification, the stop may be forcibly stopped before the change time set at the start of the change, and therefore, when stopping the change, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. .

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the rotation is 100 rotations or more after the big hit (step Y306). It should be noted that whether the rotation is 100 rotations or more after the big hit can be determined by the value of the number of times of high probability change or the number of times of time shortening change. If not more than 100 rotations after the big hit (step Y306; N), the display time table 1 (see FIG. 126 (c)) is set (step Y307), and the routine goes to step Y309. If the rotation is 100 revolutions or more after the big hit (step Y306; Y), the display time table 2 (see FIG. 126 (d)) is set (step Y308), and the process proceeds to step Y309. Thereafter, the display time corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern is obtained and saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y309).

  Then, the special figure 1 game processing number “2” related to the special figure 1 display processing is set (step Y310), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y311). Next, a signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y312). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as a control information of the special figure 1 change display game on the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag relating to the change stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 change control flag area (step Y313). ), The special figure 1 changing process ends.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation processing]
FIG. 135 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y140) in the above-described special figure 2 game process. In the special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times of symbol determination output is updated by +1 (step Y321), a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y322), and the effect command setting processing is performed. Performed (Step Y323).

  Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y324), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y325). In the gaming machine of this modification, the stop may be forcibly stopped before the change time set at the start of the change, and therefore, when stopping the change, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. .

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the rotation is 100 rotations or more after the big hit (step Y326). It should be noted that whether the rotation is 100 rotations or more after the big hit can be determined by the value of the number of times of high probability change or the number of times of time shortening change. If it is not 100 rotations or more after the big hit (step Y326; N), the display time table 1 (see FIG. 126 (c)) is set (step Y327), and the process proceeds to step Y329. If the rotation is 100 revolutions or more after the big hit (step Y326; Y), the display time table 2 (see FIG. 126 (d)) is set (step Y328), and the process proceeds to step Y329. Thereafter, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is obtained and saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y329).

  Then, a special figure 2 game processing number “2” related to the special figure 2 displaying process is set (step Y330), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y331). Next, a signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y332). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as a control information of the special figure 2 change display game on the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag relating to the change stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 change control flag area (step Y333). ), The special figure 2 changing process ends.

[Processing while displaying special figure 1]
136 and 137 show the special figure 1 displaying process (step Y110) in the above-described special figure 1 game process. In the special figure 1 display processing, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting processing in the special figure 1 change start processing is loaded (step Y401), and the small hit flag is set. One area is cleared (step Y402).

  Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting processing in the special figure 1 change start processing is loaded (step Y403), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared (step Y404). Then, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is big hit information (step Y405), and if it is not a big hit (step Y405; N), the process proceeds to step Y424. If it is a big hit (step Y405; Y), a special figure 2 forcible stop process for forcibly stopping the special figure 2 variable display game as a result of a loss is performed (step Y406). As a result, when the special figure 1 variable display game ends with a big hit first, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly ended with a loss result. Thereafter, a test signal relating to the start of the big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the special figure 1 big hit) (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal ON, and the special symbol 1 signal ON) ) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y407).

  Then, the round number upper limit table is set (step Y408), and the round number upper limit value (12, 5, or 4 in the case of the present modification) corresponding to the special figure 1 round number upper limit information is obtained, and the round number upper limit value is obtained. It is saved in the value area (step Y409). Further, a round LED pointer corresponding to the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information is obtained and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y410).

  Next, a command is provided from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y411), and a decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area to prepare. Then (step Y412), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y413). After that, a probability information command relating to information for setting the probability of a winning result in the special figure change display game to a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A414), and effect command setting processing (step A415) is performed. . Then, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y416), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y417).

  Next, the special winning opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a big hit in the special figure change display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y418). In the case of the present modified example, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the special winning opening information and the probability. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. Thereafter, a big hit fanfare time corresponding to the big win opening information is set (step Y419), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y420). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y421) and saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y422). Further, a fanfare / interval mid-process transition setting process (step Y423) is performed, and the special figure 1 displaying process ends.

  On the other hand, in step Y405, if the special map 1 is not a big hit (step Y405; N), that is, if the big hit flag 1 is out of information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (small hit information). (Step Y424). If the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y424; Y), a special figure 2 forcible stop process for forcibly stopping the special figure 2 variable display game as a result of a loss is performed (step Y425). As a result, when the special figure 1 variable display game ends earlier with a small hit, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly ended with a loss result.

  Further, a command is provided from the decorative special figure 1 command area, saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y426), and a decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area to prepare. (Step Y427), effect command setting processing is performed (Step Y428). Then, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y429), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y430), and special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing (step Y431) is performed, and special figure 1 displaying processing is performed. To end.

  If it is determined in step Y424 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y424; N), a special figure game information check process (step Y432) related to the setting of the effect mode is performed. Next, the process number is set to “0” related to the special figure ordinary processing (step Y434), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step A435), and the processing for displaying the special figure 1 is ended. I do. In this case, since the special figure 1 variable display game is a loss, the processing for forcibly terminating the special figure 2 variable display game with the result of the loss is not performed.

[Processing while displaying special figure 2]
138 and 139 show the special figure 2 displaying process (step Y141) in the above-described special figure 2 game process. In the special figure 2 displaying process, the same process as the above-described special figure 1 displaying process is performed on the special figure 2. In the special figure 2 displaying process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 change start process is loaded (step Y441), and the small hit flag is set. Two areas are cleared (step Y442).

  Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting processing in the special figure 2 change start processing is loaded (step Y443), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y444). Then, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is big hit information (step Y445), and if it is not a big hit (step Y445; N), the process proceeds to step Y464. If it is a big hit (step Y445; Y), a special figure 1 forcible stop process for forcibly stopping the special figure 1 variable display game as a result of the loss is performed (step Y446). As a result, when the special figure 2 variable display game ends with a big hit first, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly ended with a loss result. Thereafter, a test signal relating to the start of the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game (for example, the special figure 2 big hit) is turned on, for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned on, and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned on. ) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y447).

  Then, a round number upper limit table is set (step Y448), and the round number upper limit value (12, 5, or 4 in the case of the present modification) corresponding to the special figure 2 round number upper limit information is obtained, and the round number upper limit value is obtained. It is saved in the value area (step Y449). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information is obtained and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y450).

  Next, a command is created from the decorative special figure 2 command area, saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y451), and a decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area to prepare. Then (step Y452), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y453). Thereafter, a probability information command relating to information for setting the probability of a hit result in the special figure change display game to a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A454), and effect command setting processing (step A455) is performed. . Then, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y456), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y457).

  Next, the special winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a big hit in the special figure change display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y458). In the case of the present modified example, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the special winning opening information and the probability. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. Thereafter, a big hit fanfare time corresponding to the big winning opening opening information is set (step Y459), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y460). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y461) and saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y462). Further, a fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y463) is performed, and the special figure 2 displaying processing ends.

  On the other hand, in step Y445, if the special map 2 is not a big hit (step Y425; N), that is, if the big hit flag 2 is the outlier information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information). (Step Y464). If the small hit flag 2 indicates a small hit (step Y464; Y), a special figure 1 forcible stop process for forcibly stopping the special figure 1 variable display game as a result of a loss is performed (step Y465). As a result, if the special figure 2 variable display game ends first with a small hit, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly ended with a loss result.

  Further, a command is provided from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y466), and a decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area to prepare. (Step Y467), effect command setting processing is performed (Step Y468). Then, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y469), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y470), and special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing (step Y471) is performed, and special figure 2 displaying processing is performed. To end.

  If it is determined in step Y464 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y464; N), a special figure game information check process (step Y472) relating to the setting of the effect mode is performed. Next, “0” relating to the special figure ordinary processing is set as the processing number (step Y474), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step A475), and the processing during the special figure 2 display is ended. I do. In this case, since the special figure 2 variable display game is a loss, the process of forcibly terminating the special figure 1 variable display game with the result of the loss is not performed.

[Special figure 2 forced stop processing]
FIG. 140 shows the special figure 2 forcible stop processing (step Y406) in the above-described special figure 1 displaying processing. In this special figure 2 forced stop processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y501). Whether or not the special figure 2 change display game is running can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  If the special figure 2 change display game is not being executed (step Y501; N), the special figure 2 forced stop process ends. When the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y501; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 displaying process is in progress (step Y502). That is, in this case, based on the special result of the special figure 1 variable display game, the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with the result of the loss. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable display game has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also a target of the forced stop.

  When the special figure 2 is being displayed (step Y502; Y), the process proceeds to step Y504. When the special figure 2 is not being displayed (N in step Y502), the number of times of outputting the symbol determination number is updated by +1 (step Y503), and the process proceeds to step Y504. Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y504). Here, if the result is incorrect, the display time for the error is saved.

  Then, a design symbol command of the decorative special figure 2 is prepared (step Y505), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y506). Then, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y508), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y508), and special figure 2 display processing transition setting processing 2 is performed (step Y509), and special figure 2 compulsory. The stop processing ends. In addition, in the effect control device 300, when the special figure 2 variable display game is already stopped and the display time has elapsed, when the decoration special figure 2 stop command is received, the processing related to the stop of the special figure 2 variable display game is performed. No, but if the result is not a missed result, replace the result with the missed result.

[Special figure 2 display in progress process setting process 2]
FIG. 141 shows the special figure 2 in-display process shift setting processing 2 (step Y509) in the above-described special figure 2 forced stop processing. In the special figure 2 display processing shift setting processing 2, first, a special figure 2 game processing number “2” related to the special figure 2 display processing is set (step Y511), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Is saved (step Y512).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y513), and thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure 2 is displayed. The stop flag relating to the fluctuation stop on the display 52 is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of the special figure 2 (step Y514). Then, as the setting of the information to be the result of the deviation, the deviation stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y515), and the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y516).

  Next, the special figure 2 large winning opening information area is cleared (step Y517), the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y518), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y519). ). Then, the shift stop symbol number is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol area (step Y520), and the process shift setting process 2 during the special figure 2 display is ended. With the above processing, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being forcibly terminated based on the end of the display time for displaying the result as a special result.

[Special figure 1 forced stop processing]
FIG. 142 shows the special figure 1 forcible stop processing (step Y446) in the above-described special figure 2 displaying processing. In the special figure 1 forced stop processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 change display game is also being executed (step Y521). Whether the special figure 1 change display game is running or not can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  If the special figure 1 change display game is not being executed (step Y521; N), the special figure 1 forced stop processing ends. If the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y521; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 displaying process is in progress (step Y522). That is, in this case, based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result, the running special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of the loss. In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game has already completed the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not been completed, the forced stop is also performed.

  If the special figure 1 is being displayed (step Y522; Y), the process proceeds to step Y524. If the special figure 1 is not being processed (N in step Y522), the number of times of symbol determination output is updated by +1 (step Y523), and the flow shifts to step Y524. Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y524). Here, if the result is incorrect, the display time for the error is saved.

  Then, a lost symbol command of the decorative special figure 1 is prepared (step Y525), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y526). Thereafter, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y528), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y528), and special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2 is performed (step Y529), and special figure 1 compulsory. The stop processing ends. In addition, in the effect control device 300, when the special figure 1 variable display game is already stopped and the display time has elapsed, when the decorative special figure 1 stop command is received, the processing related to the stop of the special figure 1 variable display game is performed. No, but if the result is not a missed result, replace the result with the missed result.

[Special figure 1 display in progress transition setting processing 2]
FIG. 143 shows the special figure 1 in-display process shift setting processing 2 (step Y529) in the above-described special figure 1 forced stop processing. In the special figure 1 display processing shift setting processing 2, first, a special figure 1 game processing number “2” related to the special figure 1 display processing is set (step Y531), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Is saved (step Y532).

  Next, a signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y533), and thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 1 is displayed. The stop flag relating to the fluctuation stop on the display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y534). Then, as the setting of the information for obtaining the result of the loss, the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y535), and the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y536).

  Next, the special figure 1 big winning opening opening information area is cleared (step Y537), the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y538), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y539). ). Then, the slip stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y540), and the special figure 1 in-display process shift setting processing 2 ends. According to the above processing, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with the result of the special figure 1 variable display game based on the end of the display time for displaying the result as a special result.

  As described above, the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) executes the second variable display game when performing the execution control of the first variable display game (the special figure 1 variable display game). When the second variable display game (the special figure 2 variable display game) in which the execution control is performed by the control means (game control device 100) has a special result, the first variable display game performing the execution control Can be ended as a result other than the special result, and the second variable display game execution control means executes the first variable display game execution control means when performing the execution control of the second variable display game. When the first variable display game in which the control is being performed has a special result, the second variable display game that is performing the execution control can be ended as a result other than the special result. The Rukoto. With this, when a special result is derived in one of the variable display games, the other variable display game can be forcibly stopped with a disconnection result, so that no trouble occurs even when performing simultaneous fluctuation. Can be

  Note that the upper limit number of the special figure 2 suspension (second start storage) may be set to 0. The special figure 2 variable display game based on the winning may be started only when there is a prize to the ordinary variable prize device 37 in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started. In this case, if there is a prize in the second start winning opening 37 in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, the special figure 2 variable display game is temporarily started in order to perform the special figure 2 variable display game start processing based on the winning. The second start memory is not used to suspend the start of the special figure change display game unlike the first start memory.

  In addition, the upper limit number of the second start memory is set to 0, and only the small hit and the big hit can be generated in the special figure 2 variable display game, and the change time in the case of the small hit may be a short time. It is preferable that the change time is less than the display time of the normal big hit, and even if the special figure 2 variable display game in which the small hit is started after the display time of the normal big hit is started, the special figure 2 variable display game is started. It is more preferable to end the display time earlier than the display time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the display time of the special hit 1 is usually a big hit. By doing in this way, when a normal big hit occurs in the first special figure variable display game and the display time is reached, the normal variable winning device 37 wins a game ball to start the special figure 2 variable display game, It is possible to forcibly change the normal jackpot to a missed result.

  In this case, a notification is made so that the game proceeds in a left-handed manner except in the special game state. In addition, in a normal gaming state that is not a high probability state or a time saving state, in order to prevent right-handing for the purpose of generating a small hit, if a prize to the ordinary variable prize device 37 is detected in the normal gaming state, a warning is issued. May be performed. Further, by setting the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state to be an extremely long variation time (for example, 10 minutes), even if the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, it is not advantageous for the player. Is also good.

  Further, similarly to the first embodiment, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 may not be opened in the normal gaming state, and may be opened only in the high probability state or the time saving state. In this case, in the high-probability state and the time-saving state, the fluctuation time and the display time of the general-figure fluctuation display game are made extremely short, and when the player makes a right-handed driving, the vehicle almost surely passes through the general-figure start gate 34. The prize device 37 is almost certainly won. In this way, if the player makes a right-hand operation immediately after the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit and the variable time ends, before the display time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends, A small hit can be generated in the special figure 2 variable display game, and the normal big hit in the special figure 1 variable display game can be forcibly changed to a loss result.

  From the above, the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning port (starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37) provided in the game area 32, and the result of the variable displaying game is a special result. In the gaming machine that generates a special game state in which a game value can be given to the player, the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) and the first start winning opening are set as the start winning opening. Has a second start winning port (in the normal variable winning device 37) disposed at a different position, and executes the first variable display game as a variable display game based on the winning of a game ball into the first start winning port. Possible first variable display game executing means (game control device 100) and second variable display game executing means capable of executing a second variable display game as a variable display game based on winning of a game ball into a second starting winning opening. (Game control device 00), the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are controlled by adjusting the firing force of the game ball so as to aim for the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. Is provided in the game area 32 so as to be able to select a state aiming for a prize. For a predetermined period after the end of the special game state, the probability that the result of the variable display game becomes a special result is higher than that in the normal state. High probability state generating means (game control device 100) capable of generating a probability state, wherein the special result includes a first special result (probable change) capable of generating a first special game state (special game state based on a big hit). A big hit), a second special result (usually a big hit), and a second special game state (a special game state based on a small hit) in which a game value that can be given to the player is lower than the first special game state. Includes 3 special results (small hits) and high probability When the result of the variable display game is the first special result, the result of the variable display game is set as a high probability state over a predetermined period after the end of the first special game state based on the first special result. The probability of becoming the first special result is made higher than in the normal state, and if the result of the change display game becomes the second special result, the change is made after the end of the first special game state based on the second special result. If the probability that the result of the display game is the first special result is the normal state, and if the result of the variable display game is the third special result, after the end of the second special game state based on the third special result, The probability that the result of the variable display game will be the first special result is set to be the same as the probability before the third special result is derived, and the first variable display game execution means executes the first variable display game. Controlling In this case, when the second variable display game for which the execution control is performed by the second variable display game execution means ends with a special result, the first variable display game for which the execution control is performed is changed to a result other than the special result. The second variable display game executing means may execute the first variable display game executing means while performing the second variable display game execution control. When the variable display game ends with a special result, the second variable display game that is performing the execution control can be ended as a result other than the special result.

  In addition, the variable display game includes a variable time and a display time for displaying a result after the variable time, and the variable display game is configured to end with the end of the display time. (3) The display time when the special result is derived is shorter than the display time when other results are derived. In addition, the total time of the fluctuation time and the display time in the fluctuation display game as the third special result is shorter than the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display game as the second special result. In addition, the probability that the result of the second variable display game is the third special result is set higher than the probability that the result of the first variable display game is the third special result.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine as described in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, but includes, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball. Further, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine using medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines using gaming balls. Further, the configurations of the above-described modified examples can be appropriately combined and applied.

  The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 38 1st special variable winning device (special variable winning device)
38h Probable change operation area (specific area)
100 game control device (game control means)
300 Effect control device (effect control means)

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine that executes a game based on establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a result of the game is a special result,
A front opening / closing unit which is openably and closably supported by the support unit with one of the left and right directions as a rotation axis and the other as an open side,
And a control board for controlling of the gaming machine,
The control board includes a plurality of board-side connectors that are connectors for detachably connecting cables,
In the cable, a plurality of codes are arranged in a row or a plurality of rows in parallel , and a code with identification information is arranged at an end of the row ,
The plurality of board-side connectors arranged in a predetermined range are arranged such that the cords to be connected are aligned in the same direction ,
Among the cables in which the plurality of cords are arranged in parallel in one row or a plurality of rows, the board-side connector to which the cable in which the plurality of cords are arranged in one row is connected, the cord alignment direction of the connected cable is A gaming machine, wherein the code is arranged in the left-right direction and the code with the discrimination information is on the open side .   In a gaming machine that executes a game based on establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a result of the game is a special result,
  A front opening / closing unit that is openably and closably supported by the support unit with one of the left and right directions as a rotation axis and the other as an open side,
  A board on which a plurality of board-side connectors, which are connectors for detachably connecting cables, are provided,
  In the cable, a plurality of codes are arranged in a line, and a code with identification information is arranged at an end of the line,
  The plurality of board-side connectors arranged in a predetermined range are arranged so that the connected cords are aligned in the same direction,
  In the board-side connector to which a cable in which a plurality of cords are arranged in a line is connected, an arrangement direction of the cords of the connected cables is the left-right direction, and the cord with the identification information is the open side. Game machine characterized by being arranged as follows.

Images